U.S. ARMY 
t A 
MEDICAL SUPPLY SERVICES SCHOOL 
TEXT BOOK 
VOLUME 4 
OPTICAL 
SECTIONS I TO XVII This publication has not' been officially approved 
by the War Department. It has been prepared 
and is issued for instructional purposes only. TABLE OF CONTENTS 
SECTION 
TITLE 
1 History of Optics 
2 History of Army Program 
3 Rules and Policies 
4 Prescription 
5 Focal Power of Ophthalmic Lenses 
6 Facial Measurements 
7 Interpretation of Prescription 
8 Adjusting and Fitting 
9 Stock Control 
10 Marking and Cutting 
11 Edge Grinding 
12 Bench Work Assembly 
13 Surface Grinding 
14 Inspection 
15 Bnergency Repairs of Spectacles 
16 Shipping and Packing 
17 Maintenance and Repair of Equipment 
Glossary SECTION I 
HISTORY OF OPTICS THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
The history of optical science is necessarily closely related to the history of 
glass. It is the general opinion that glass was first put to practical use in Egypt 
about the year 3000 B.C. in the form of glass beads. However, there is a divergence 
of opinion as to whether Syria, Egypt, Ceylon, or China can rightfully lay claim to 
its discovery. With the progress of glass-making came transparent glass about the 
year 600 B.C In 306 B. C there is a record of "mirrors of glittering glass" having 
been carried in a procession in India. The first record of glass being used as an 
aid to vision in the form of spectacles cooes late in the 13th century when the 
writer Meissner, mentions that old people derived advantages from spectacles. 
So far as we can judge man's interest in optics started with a drop of water. 
Take a small piece of glass. Stick a bit of type printing on the back of it so that 
you can read the print through the glass, over the printing spread a little white 
vaseline very thinly. Then carefully put a small drop of water on the vaseline, 
over the type, the size of the letters increases; they are magnified. 
Probably primitive man sms this phenomenon countless times and thought nothing 
of it. A drop of rain on a dry leaf will enlarge the veins of the leaf and make 
them stand out. A rounded drop of water on a tiny grain of sand makes it appear 
like a small pebble. Any nunfcer of such manifestations man must have seen. Finally 
it appears to have dawned on him that there was a connection between the rounded 
form and the ability to make things appear larger than they were; because there is 
evidence that the ancients used round bowls or flasks filled with water for this 
very purpose. Such articles have been found in the ruins of early civilization; and 
from the same period came examples of beautiful engraving, so fine that they could 
not possibly have been done with the naked eye, jewels accurately cut and decorated 
in minute patterns. In some of the earliest writings we find reference to the fact 
that a globe filled with water serves as a burning glass and may be used to focus 
the suns rays so as to start a fire. 
A spherical vase filled with water magnifies an object held behind it, but it 
is also likely to distort the image. At some early date man discovered that a piece 
of glass curved outward on opposite sides, like the shape of a lentil, gave afar 
more satisfactory image. So he named such glasses after the lentil, and called them 
lenses. 
Lens shaped crystals and pieces of glass have been found from time to time in 
uncovering the relics of departed civilization, some in tombs of Egypt, some in the 
ruins of ancient Greece. Attempts have been made to establish these as the fore- 
runners of eyeglasses; but probably they were nothing more than jewels and articles 
of personal adornment. Legend has it that the Ehperor Nero had defective vision and 
used a large rounded emerald when viewing the fights of the gladiators. However, it 
must be concluded that although the magnifying power of the lens was known thousands 
of years ago, its use as an ordinary seeing aid or as an attenpt to correct faulty 
vision came much later. 
With the fall of the Roman empire the art of glass-making declined. There is 
little information available concerning the glass industry between the Roman period 
and the 13tn century. At this later date, glass-making was revived first in France 
and then in Engl and. But it was not until the 16th century that glass was produced 
in any quantity in England, France, or Germany. 
It seems probable that the first attempt at making optical instruments was the 
invention of spectacles. As near as can be determined these were introduced late in 
the 13th century. The first authentic mention of such a use of lenses is the 
statement in the writings of Meissner, who lived around 1240 to 1280, that old 
people derived advantage from spectacles. 
Section I - Page 1 THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
In the archives of a French Abbey, the statement is found that in 1282, a 
French priest Nicholas Bullet, used spectacles when signing an agreement. 
In a sermon delivered on February 23, 1305, Giordano da Rivalto asserted that 
it was "only twenty years since the art of making spectacles was discovered." But 
the first known description of the use of convex lenses as an aid to vision had 
already come from the pen of Roger Bacon, English monk and philosopher, in 1266. 
And from Bacon’s time on there are frequent references to spectacles in various 
manuscripts that have been preserved to this day. 
Marco Polo, greatest of medieval travelers and whose exploits are said to have 
started Christopher Columbus on the journey that brought him to the shores of 
America, wrote in 1298, that spectacles were extensively worn by the nobility in 
China. Research leads to the belief that these glasses had no magnification and 
corrected no optical defects. They were merely worn because of the dignity and 
poise they gave. 
Salvino d’Armato is reputed to have invented spectacles in 1285. A tombstone 
in the church of Santa Maria Maggiore in Florence bears the inscription, "Here lies 
Salvino d’Armato, called Armati of Florence, the inventor of spectacles. God 
pardon him for his sins. " 
The first picture in which spectacles are diown on a person is that of Cardinal 
Ugone painted in 1360 by de Modena. It now hangs in the church of San Nicola in 
Treviso. It is noted that all early references to these seeing aids are in con- 
nection with churchmen. Yet this is natural, for in those days they were the only 
ones who could read or write. 
Spectacles remained uncommon and of comparatively little interest to the world 
until after the invention of the printing press. Interest gained rapidly after 
the advent of printed material and by 1600, lens grinders could be found in nearly 
every town of importance in Europe. 
It was just about this time that the telescope was invented. The first 
telescope appears to have been invented by one of two Dutch spectacle-makers, 
Zacharias Janson or Franz Lippershey. Gallileo, having heard of this Dutch toy, was 
1 ed to experiment with a combination of two lenses and he soon succeeded ( 1609) in 
making a telescope with which he made a number of renown astronomical discoveries. 
Much as ancient astrologists had learned about the stars, the telescope revealed 
that the naked eye had told but the least part of the story. Astronomy became 
an important study. The question created stimulated the further study of mathematics 
The increasing demand for more accurate observations resulted in the invention of 
the achromatic telescope objective in 1757. Soon after the invention of the tele- 
scope the Dutch naturalist, Leeuwenhoek, invented the microscope (1673). The 
increasing demands of the scientific field coupled with the wider education of the 
public and the increasing demand for spectacles soon brought on great improvements 
in the methods of manufacture and the standardization of ophthalmic glass. 
In 1593 J.B. Porta explained the action of the concave lens on a near sighted 
eye and tells of later grinding piano concave, piano convex, double concave and 
double convex lenses in Venice. 
About fifty years after Charles I granted a charter to the Spectacle Makers 
Guild of England, a document that dates back to 1629, an English lens grinder 
Section I - Page 2 THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
invented the method of grinding a number of lenses together on one block. This 
increased the production and consequently decreased the cost of spectacles. At 
this time spectacles cost about $100 which was equivalent to $400 or $500 today. 
For many years spectacles lenses were all spherically ground. The theory for 
making them depended entirely on only one of the principles of seeing; namely that 
it is easier to see large objects than small ones. The difference between one pair 
of spectacles and another was merely a matter of how much each magnified. A person 
tried on various pairs of spectacles until he found a pair which increased the size 
of things enough to distinguish them, even though they might still be blurred and 
d istorted. 
In 1825 Sir George B. Airy demonstrated that astigmatism can be corrected by 
cyl ind r ica 11 y ground lenses. But his discovery was a little ahead of times. The 
mathematics of lens grinding was not yet very well understood. There are so many 
forms and degrees of astigmatism that it proved a difficult fault to correct with 
the knowledge and information then available. So it was not until about thirty or 
forty years ago that the correction of astigmatism became common. 
In 1784 Benjamin Franklin invented the first bifocal lens, now known as the 
split bifocal. Finding the use of one pair of spectacles for distance and another 
pair for reading most inconvenient, he split the lenses in half horizontally and 
fitted one half of a distance lens and one half of a reading lens together, inserting 
them in one frame. This led to the development of the cement bifocal. The cement 
bifocal is made by cementing a thin supplementary lens or segment to the main 
distance lens with Canadian balsam. The segment is made of crown glass and is 
applied to the inner spherical surface of the distance lens. Therefore, one surface 
of the segment must be ground to the same curvature as the inside spherical surface 
of the main lens. The other surface of the segment is ground to give whatever 
reading addition is called for. 
The terms "flint” and "crown" as applied to optical glass were derived in a 
very interesting way. Of all the terms used in conjunction with optical glass these 
two seem to be the least clear in the minds of persons generally interested in 
ophthalmic lenses. 
Flint glass obtains its name from the fact that when lead was first introduced 
as glass-making material, for the production of tableware and the like, ground 
flints were used as the source of silica in its composition. Today flint glass is 
that which contains lead oxide in its chemical structure. 
The origin of the word "crown", to describe glass, is more obscure. It was 
originally applied to the type of window glass made in the shape of discs, the 
center of which formed a bullion such as is still seen in the 17th and 18th century 
houses in England. Prior tothe introduction of glass especially made for ophthalmic 
lenses, thick pieces of crown glass were used for grinding lenses and those so 
produced were called "crown" lenses. At the present time the term "crown" is 
generally considered as applying to glass containing silica, soda or potash and 
lime, when such glass is used for ophthalmic lenses or optical instruments. 
Glass is made by melting or fusing, at high temperatures, of three principle 
ingred ient s: 
1. An acid ingredient - sand, which is known chemically as silica. 
2. An alkaline ingredient - soda or potash or a mixture of the two. 
3. One or more earth materials - lime, lead, barium, zinc, etc. 
Section I - Page 3 THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
The physical qualities and color of glass vary according to the ingredients 
used in making it, according to the proportions in which these are mixed, and 
according to the process of manufactureu There are many kinds of glass from "bottle" 
glass which frequently has a green or yellow color due to impurities, to beautiful 
plate glass, cut glass, glass from which imitation jewels are made, optical glass, 
and ophthalmic glass. 
Optical glass is that used in making lenses for optical instruments in general; 
more particularly telescopes, microscopes, and so on. Ophthalmic glass is that 
used in making eyeglass lenses. 
There are many peculiar and intricate problems to be solved in making both 
optical and ophthalmic glass. Three of the most important requirements are purity, 
uniformity, and refractive index. 
Impurities in the ingredients that go to make up a batch of ophthalmic glass 
are likely to result in objectional color. Lack of uniformity in any portion of the 
finished lens would result in an incorrect bending of the rays of light passing 
through it, throwing the image out of focus. And, as has already been explained, 
the density of the glass itself determines its refractive index. 
Purity comes from the careful selection of raw materials. Uniformity results 
from scientifically correct and accurately controlled manufacturing methods. 
Refractive index depends on the proper proportioning of the right kinds of materials. 
Few people realize how intricate the making of a pair of spectacles really is. 
We consider the making of fine watches a great art; and so it is. But any skilled 
mechanic can learn to make a good watch. Making eyeglasses, on the other hand, 
requires a vast scientific and mathematical knowledge as well as technologic skill 
that makes watch making seem more child’s play in comparison. The examination given 
by the ref ract ionist discloses how much and in what direction light rays must be 
bent in order to correct the deficiency of the eye. The lens provided must meet this 
requirement, exactly. In the final analysis it is the lens that is the corrective 
agent. 
If the bending of the light rays by the lens depended on a single factor, it 
would not be difficult; but it depends on several factors. It depends, for example, 
on the curvature of the front of the glass, on the curvature of the back of the 
glass, on the refractive index of the glass, and the thickness of the glass. All of 
these can be figured out by higher mathematics, but even then unless the glass is 
perfect and uniform through out, all of these calculations will be wrong. Even with 
all the precautions of scientific knowledge and modern production precision, often 
no more than two percent of a batch of glass finds its way into lenses. 
The raw materials for good ophthalmic glass come from the four corners of the 
earth, sought out on the basis of their purity. Probably close to one eighth of the 
earths crust is silica, sand, the main ingredient; but there are few spots where 
sand of sufficient purity and the right qualities, for this particular glass, can be 
obtained. In America, the choicest sand comes from a little section of Pennsylvania 
and a small section of West Virginia. The potash comes largely from Germany. The 
soda comes from South America except that sodium carbonate which is prepared by 
chemical process from salt obtained in New York state. Lime comes from Ohio and 
Kentucky; lead from Missouri; barium from West Virginia; zinc from New Jersey; 
and antimony from China. It is not that these various ingredients can be found only 
in the location mentioned; it is necessary to go to these various places in order to 
get materials best suited for ophthalmic glass. 
Section I - Page 4 THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
A year before a batch of glass is to be made, a melting pot is made; because it 
takes a year for these pots to age. Before the pot is used it is glazed with scraps 
of previously made optical glass so that no impurities can be picked up from the 
po t. 
After the carefully selected raw materials have been received are! are carefully 
inspected and checked, they are weired out according to formula; thoroughly mixed; 
and put into the glazed clay pot. A small amount of glass scrap of the same type, 
called cullet, is added; because, having already been melted once, it softens more 
quickly than the new materials and thus aids in carrying out the melting and fining 
opera t ions. 
The pot and its contents go into the melting furnace where the temperature is 
raised to as high as 2600 degrees Fahrenheit. Any ordinary thermometer would melt 
under this terrific heat, so, to control the heat of the pot and its contents, a 
remarkable optical thermometer is used. This instrument measures the intensity 
of the light given off by the mol ton mass and thereby indicates the temperature. 
It takes seven or eight hours for a batch to melt. Then comes the fining 
process which takes another seven or eight hours. During the period, the batch is 
thoroughly mixed to assure uniformity, and the bubbles are removed. To help the 
bubbles rise and escape, the batch is stirred rapidly shortly after the melting is 
completed. Then, after the bubbles have been removed and the glass is at the 
highest temperature, the practice is to stir the glass during the preliminary 
cooling in the pot, first with a rather rapid motion; more slowly as the glass 
thickens. 
Six to seven hours of controlled cooling brings the glass to a consistency of 
thick molasses or taffy. The pot is then taken from the furnace; the glass is 
poured out on a large table and a roller passes over it, rolling it down to the 
desired thickness, usually about threc-eighths of an inch. The sheets become hard, 
solid glass almost immediately, but they are still very hot. And, because glass 
is a poor conductor of heat, they are then removed to an annealing furnace so that 
they can be cooled very slowly. Otherwise, the outside would get cold before the 
inside of the sheet. The glass would become brittle, optically irregular and full 
of internal strains. Ophthalmic glass is usually given eight hours for cooling but 
glass for some of the huge telescopes requires as much as a year to come down to 
room temperature. 
When properly cooled, the sheet of glass is cut into little squares called 
blanks, each one a little larger than the size of an eyeglass lens. Then starts the 
inspection, rejection, and selection that may eventually reduce a six hundred pound 
batch of ophthalmic glass to no more than twelve pounds of finished lenses. At this 
very first stage, one out of four blanks is rejected, on the average. 
After this inspection and sorting according to weight by a delicately accurate, 
intricate machine, those blanks which so far are deemed satisfactory for lenses are 
heated, moulded into the approximate shape of the lens desired, and given a final 
and very complete annealing. Annealing is a s.loje, definitely controlled cooling 
process which "draws the temper" from the glass. It not only removes brittleness, 
it also reduces tension and strain within the inner structure of the material. 
Next comes grinding. A number of pressings are mounted on a block by being 
cemented to it with pitch. Then a shell of the exact desired curvature fits doan 
against the pieces of pressed glass. Emery is placed between the glass and the 
shell, and the shell is moved with a rotating and oscillating motion that grinds the 
Section I - Page 5 THE HISTORY OF OPTICS 
glass away until it is curved exactly the same as the master shell. After grinding, 
the surface is polished in the same way by substituting fine rouge for emery. 
If the reverse side of the lens is to be curved, the pieces of glass are re- 
mounted with the other side up and this is ground in the same way, using whatever 
curvature is called for, which may or may not be the same as that of the first side. 
Washing and rigid inspection follow. The lenses are lacquered to protect their 
surfaces until completed. They have still to be cut and edged to the desired size 
and shape. 
All told there are some forty-five inspections before good eyeglasses lenses 
are finally approved; the final inspection is made by means of an instrument which 
checks up on that vital question of whether they actually bend the rays of light 
exactly as desired. This instrument is called a lensometer, vertometer, or other 
name as the different manufacturers may designate. 
Today, each lens is individually designed to correct some particular optical 
defect or condition. The ref r action! st of today makes a painstaking examination 
and determines among other things, the strength and percentage of vision in each 
eye, the exact lens or combination of lenses necessary to give clear, comfortable, 
and efficient vision. The proper correction of refractive errors in vision depends 
on the lenses used. To insure the best results with eyeglasses, the lenses them- 
selves, should be of the best quality and workmanship. Interpretation of the 
prescription, determination of the precise formula for the lenses needed in each 
case, and the grinding of the lenses to that formula, are the responsibilities of 
specialists who have had years of training and possess an exacting ability. 
Section I - Page 6 SECTION II 
HISTORY OF ARMY PROGRAM HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
During the last War the need of spectacles for military personnel was not 
given serious attention, until these men were in the actual theatre of operations. 
Therefore, it was not until the troops arrived in France that the need of an Optical 
Repair Section manifest itself. This Optical Repair Section was established 
in Paris directly under the supervision of Colonel Edmonds assisted by Captain 
Bohling with the enlisted personnel strength of approximately twenty men. Here, at 
this shop, they set up a complete optical shop, surface grinding, cutting, edging 
and assembling, where they were able to dispense spectacles using flat lenses and 
steel rimmed 40 and 42 round eye frames. The delay in filling prescriptions was 
considerable as the stock of finished lenses was inadequate for their needs, which 
necessitated considerable surface grinding. Nevertheless, many pairs of glasses 
were made before the Armistice was signed, although at that time there was a back 
log of some 20,000 requisitions for glasses. 
In 1941, when it was decided that the Surgeon General’s Office would be 
responsible for correcting the visual deficiency and maintenance of the spectacles, 
plans were formulated for a number of Mobile Optical Repair Units, These units were 
to go overseas and each unit would service an Army of 200,000 to 400,000 troops. 
Equipment and materials for this unit were contained in a standard 2lA ton truck and 
a 1 ton trailer. They were made by the three leading optical manufacturers using 
their own type of edging stones, cutters, markers, etc,, consequently, each unit 
varied from its fellow depending on the manufacturer. Containing such articles as 
frame cleaners, lens hardening units, drilling machines, etc,, the equipment in 
these Mobile Units was very complete but in many instances unnecessary. 
In the Fall of 1942, plans were set forth to standardize and simplify the 
equipment, but first the prescribing of the glasses, and foci of powers prescribed 
had to be kept in the simplest form, therefore, it was decided that only one type of 
spectacle frame would be issued. This frame was a white metal frame, in a P3 shape, 
Fulvue style, eye sizes from 40 to 46, Further, it was decided that no other types 
of spectacles would be serviced overseas and that all Commanding Officers of Mobile 
Units would be so instructed. Also, the Advisory Board decided that no prescriptions 
would be written in l/8th diopters and that the prescribing of spectacles in which 
the power in the strongest meridian was 1 diopter or under would be discouraged. 
A stock pile of many hundred of thousands of glasses were set up. The range of 
foci was increased so that Mobile Units could service all but approximately 5% of 
the prescriptions that they received. This necessitated considerable work for the 
manufacturers as these foci were not powers that were ordinarily carried in stock. 
Furthermore, it was decided that to take care of the 5% prescriptions which were odd 
powered combinations and not feasible to carry as a stock item; surface machinery 
and rough semi-finished cylinders would be added to the present mobile equipment. 
No bi-focal blanks were included as it was not deemed feasible due to the extra 
amount of equipment and stock that was needed for such a small percentage of this 
type of lenses were used. Instructions were issued that were it absolutely necessary 
to make bi-focals, the Opi f ex or cemented type should be supplied. With the addi- 
tion of the surface grinding equipment and rough semi-finished cylinders, combined 
with the increased foci range, all but a very small percentage of the prescriptions 
could be filled. 
In the meantime, the optical situation in this country had become very acute 
due to the unforeseen demand. The original total requirements contemplated were for 
a quarter of a million pair of glasses but by the Spring of 1943, the optical 
manufacturers in this country were being called upon to supply upwards of 180,000 
of spectacles per month, which was beyond their ability due to the shortage of 
skilled labor and the necessity of retooling at their frame factories so that the 
Section II - Page 1 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
specifications of the Government issue frames could be met. With the frame pro- 
duction capacity of only 150,000 of this type, it was necessary that something 
drastic be done to eliminate the back log of prescriptions that were rapidly over- 
taking the manufacturers due to this production bottleneck# Upon analysis it was 
discovered that over 43% of the prescriptions that were being written were for 
powers of 1 diopter or under in the meridian of their greatest effect# Further 
investigation showed that men wearing low powers, or that required 1 diopter or less 
were receiving their glasses before going overseas, whereas, there were numbers of 
cases of men completely handicapped without their glasses having to leave without 
them# It was therefore decided that no spectacles would be issued in which the 
powers of the strongest meridian was of 1 diopter or less# The Surgeon General’s 
Office realized that this placed a hardship on some men, but it was necessary so 
that the men handicapped without glasses would be assured of receiving them before 
leaving for overseas duty. This was done and the acute condition was alleviated# 
Early in 1942, on recommendations from the field, the Surgeon General’s Office 
undertook to design a Portable Optical Repair Unit that would fit in one or two 
standard medical chests and still contain sufficient stock and equipment to service 
small bodies of troops# It was to be designed so that it could be operated by one 
skilled optician, having as equipment a hand operated edging stone, cutter, small 
optical tools and foci range the same as in the Mobile Unit# After being field 
tested several times the design was adopted# 
Also, there was being developed a spectacle frame to be worn under a gas mask# 
The first type produced was made in the standard 38 and 40 round frames with flat 
wide temples fitting snugly to the side of the face# This frame when properly 
fitted was quite satisfactory, but due to the lack of sufficient skilled fitters and 
because of the possibility of this spectacle getting out of adjustment, the danger 
from gas leakage was great# It was therefore decided that other means of holding 
the corrective lens had to be devised# After a great number of exhaustive tests, 
a gas mask insert that fitted in the eye piece of the gas mask and contained the 
prescription in a 40 round eye was decided on# This insert could be removed to be 
cleaned and tests in the field proved its efficiency and while not completely 
satisfactory, was the one means of being certain that the men needing glasses could 
be sure of good visual acuity when wearing their gas masks. These inserts eliminated 
the danger of gas leakage and are now being distributed# Every man who has, without 
glasses, a visual acuity of 20-70 or worse with both eyes open will receive one 
pai r# 
Stocks of these inserts have been sent overseas and the use and directions as 
to their fitting have been issued to the Optical Unit Commanders and the various 
Posts and Station Hospitals where eye refracting work is being done# Mobile and 
Portable Units will be equipped to service these inserts and it is contemplated that 
lenses for these inserts will be ground to size (40 mm# round) by the manufacturers 
before being shipped abroad. 
There i s at present, being designed at Carlisle, Pennsylvania, a new Mobile 
Optical Repair unit which will have as part of its equipment a single surfacing 
spindle, laps and tools for surface grinding along with the simplified edging and 
cutting equipment now on the standard mobile unit# It is contemplated that it will 
be possible to standardize the equipment on this truck so that repair and replace- 
ments of equipment will be simplified and that complete grinding service will be 
available so that all prescriptions excepting solid or one-piece bi-focals can be 
filled# This equipment will be installed on a standard Medical Department surgical 
truck containing running water, heat, light and power. The power for this unit will 
be supplied by a gasoline motor generator which will be carried in the trailer. 
Section II - Page 2 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
It was the experience overseas that showed the acute need of trained opticians 
to work in these repair units, therefore in August, 1943, it was decided that an 
Optical School should be started at the Medical Supply Services School, St, Louis 
Medical Depot, where men that were opticians in civilian life could be sent and 
trained in the Army method of making glasses*. At the present writing, it has been 
found that the school can be highly successful in turning out trained men, when 
supplied with men that have had a reasonable amount of optical experience at bench 
work during their civilian life. 
THE MOBILE OPTICAL REPAIR UNIT 
The purpose of the Mobile Optical Repair Unit is to provide a self-contained 
edging and mounting laboratory to make emergency repairs and replacements of 
prescription lenses and spectacles for the American Armed Forces in the field. 
The Mobile Unit consists of the necessary marking, cutting, edging and assem- 
bling equipment together with properly balanced stocks of lenses, spectacle fronts, 
temples and spectacle cases designed and arranged to be contained and operated in a 
2lA ton U. S. Army truck and a 1 ton trailer. 
The Unit is designed to accompany and care for a field Army consisting of 
150,000 to 300,000 men and the personnel consists of one officer and six enlisted 
men. At the present time, the table of organization calls for three optical 
technicians, two clerks and a driver for the truck. The truck driver also operates 
a generator which supplies the power for the unit. 
The division of the work will be regulated by the experience and ability of the 
operators who will function under the officer in command. The capacity of the unit 
should be sixty pairs of lenses (120 single lenses) edged and assembled in an eight 
hour day and there is also capacity for soldering, straightening and repairing of 
spectacles. 
The stock although subject to variance will approximate 18,000 lenses, 4,500 
spectacle fronts and 6,000 pair of temples. The lenses are placed in individual 
envelopes, wrapped ten to a package and stocked in the steel cabinets provided for 
the purpose. Mechanical equipment (lensometer, etc,) is included in each unit to 
determine the foci and axis of spectacles and broken lens. 
In the event direct power is not available the unit is supplied by a gasoline 
electric generator of compact design and light weight as follows: Engine output of 
not less than 3 K.W,, 115 volts. A, C, , 1 Ph, , 60 cycle: Complete with accessories 
and spare parts in a carrying chest. 
The Mobile Optical Unit operators will make no refractions nor will any unit 
have the equipment for so doing. The professional ophthalmic services of examining, 
refracting and prescribing are not a function of the mobile units and must not be 
constructed as such. 
Although the unit is referred to as being mobile, it may upon reaching it’s 
initial destination be set up as a base unit and supplied with additional equipment 
including spherical surfacing machines, etc. At this time an optical repair labor- 
atory mounted in a surgical truck is being assembled and if proven satisfactory will 
undoubtedly replace the present unit as an item of standard issue. 
Section II - Page 3 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
Section II - Page 4 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
THE PORTABLE OPTICAL REPAIR UNIT 
The Portable Optical Repair Uii t is designed and equipped to replace and repair 
spectacles and gas mask inserts in the forward areas of the theatres of operation. 
The need for a unit of this type was first recognized by a survey based upon Tank 
Corps personnel during the campaign in Africa, which revealed that the life of a 
pair of spectacles was one hour- 
With the foregoing in mind, the American Army designed a compact unit con- 
structed of light but strong material that could be readily transported. Conse- 
quently, the operator can move the unit into close proximity to the troops in the 
field and render more rapid service than could be obtained from the Mobile Optical 
Repai r Units. 
As no organic transportation is provided, it will be necessary for the opera- 
tor to make arrangements with the Commanding Officer of the organization to which he 
is attached for the use of a jeep, ambulance or some similar conveyance. 
The supplies approximate 1200 pair of lenses, 6 75 spectacles fronts and 7 50 
pair of temples. At such time as the gas mask insert is made available, a reason- 
able quantity will be initial issue for the unit. A nominal supply of fit-overs are 
also stocked, enabling the operator to produce prescription combinations that would 
otherwise necessitate the use of surfacing equipment. 
The equipment consists of a hand operated edging unit, lens cutter and the 
necessary optical tools. Although primarily designed to be operated manually, the 
edging unit may be driven mechanically when a motor is available. A l/8th or 
l/4th E.P. motor that turns 1800 R.P.M’s., may be successfully used by attaching a 
1-3/4" pulley to the motor shaft. Assuming that all edging units will have a 
standard 6" pulley, this ratio will produce the required speed of approximately 
500 R.P.M’s for the edging wheel. 
When the edging unit is operated manually the handle will be turned at the 
ratio of 57 times a minute to produce the required speed. 
Inasmuch as the Portable Repair Unit is manned by one operator, it will be 
essential that he exercise initiative and the ingenuity to improvise under the most 
adverse conditions in order to maintain the unit in effective operation. 
Enlisted men that are chosen to operate Portable Optical Repair Units will have 
the satisfaction of knowing that only the better optical technicians will be given 
these assignments. 
Section II - Page 5 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
OPTICAL REPAIR UNIT (PORTABLE) 
Section II - Page 6 HISTORY OF THE ARMY PROGRAM 
OPTICAL REPAIR UNIT (PORTABLE) 
Section II - Page 7 SECTION III 
RULES AND POLICIES WAR DEPARTMENT PAMPHLET No. 8-5 
PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY 
AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
RULES AND POLICIES 
SECTION I 
GENERAL 
Paragraph 
Previous instructions rescinded 1 
Authority 2 
Designation of two types of eyeglasses 3 
Refraction of eyes 4 
Procurement and issue of eyeglasses at home stations 5 
Elimination of 1/8 diopters in prescribing 6 
New lenses for change of prescription 7 
Shipment and packing 8 
Spectacle mailing boxes 9 
Disposition of eyeglasses when address of individual is unknown 10 
Change of "Receipt of Purchase" on W. D., M. D., Form No. 130 (Spectacle Order 
Form) 11 
Vouchers and prescriptions 12 
Classification of spectacles, commercial and gas mask type, as individuals’ 
personal effects 13 
Information not to be divulged 14 
Age and visual acuity of individual typed on W. D. , M. D. Form No. 130 15 
All information on W. D. , M. D. Form No. 130 to be transcribed to carbon copies. 16 
Daily forwarding of forms to optical companies under contract 17 
Permanent record of prescription for eyeglasses 18 
1. PREVIOUS INSTRUCTIONS RESCINDED - a. This pamphlet supersedes all previous 
instructions pertaining to the procurement of spectacles, commercial and gas mask 
type, for military and other authorized personnel, including instructions issued by 
the Surgeon General in letters, radio, and teletype messages to the commanding 
generals of the service commands or to the Surgeon General’s fiscal branch offices, 
which are in conflict with this pamphlet. 
b. This pamphlet has many material changes in procedure, especially as to the 
basis of issue of eyeglasses, and therefore the need for careful study cannot be 
overemphasized, nor the importance of having these instructions brought to the 
attention of the proper officers of the eye clinics as expeditiously as possible. 
2. AUTHORITY - The authority for the procurement and repair of eyeglasses is 
as follows: 
a. For United States Army personnel, including Army nurses, members of the 
Women’s Army Auxiliary Corps, and other militarized female personnel of the Army. 
(1) The Surgeon General will provide all military personnel with spectac- 
les, when required, and will replace lenses and frames when either or 
Section III - Page 1 RULES AND POLICIES 
both are damaged or lost in the performance of military duty. 
(2) The Surgeon General will prepare such instructions as may be necessary 
and make such contracts and incidental arrangements as may be re- 
quired. (See par. 10. AR 40-1705. November 2, 1942-) 
b. (1) For authorized military personnel of any country the defense of which 
the President deems vital to the defense of the United States, when 
such authorized personnel are stationed within the forty-eight States 
and the District of Columbia and military personnel, wherever location, 
of all cobelligerent countries who cannot reasonably obtain eyeglasses 
or replacement and repair thereof from facilities of their own 
country. 
(2) ♦ ♦ ♦ for medical care and treatment of authorized personnel of any 
country whose defense the President deems vital to the defense of the 
United States when such care and treatment cannot be obtained from 
medical units of their own country * * ♦. See Military Appropriation 
Act, 1943, and S.G.O. Circular Letter 71, July 17, 1942* 
c. For internees (prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens undergoing intern- 
ment by the War Department).--Spectacles will be furnished for internees on the same 
basis as for United States troops. Cost incident thereto are chargeable to funds 
allocated to The Surgeon General. (See par. 22 for basis of issue.) 
d. Repair and replacement of eyeglasses for civilian employees of War Depart- 
ment and Red Cross workers on military missions overseas.--Necessary repair and re- 
placement of spectacles, commercial type, or spectacles, gas mask type, belonging to 
civilian employees of the War Department and Red Cross workers on military missions 
overseas will be accomplished by repair and replacement units without cost to the 
individual. (See also par. gb (15), AR 40-590, February 2, 1942.) 
3. DESIGNATION OF TWO TYPES OF EYEGLASSES - There have heretofore been two 
types of eyeglasses issued by the Surgeon General, namely, spectacles, commercial 
type (for ordinary wear), and spectacles, gas mask type ( as auxiliary eyeglasses for 
ordinary wear), the issuance of the latter type being discontinued entirely by 
provisions of paragraph 19 of this pamphlet. Hereinafter, the terms '’spectacles, 
commercial type" and "spectacles, gas mask type" will be used to designate the 
specific types of eyeglasses. 
4. REFRACTION OF EYES - When refraction of eyes is necessary and a medical 
officer is not available, request for authority to employ a civilian physician in the 
case of military and other authorized personnel on detached service or at stations 
within the continental limits of the United States will be made to the commanding 
general of the service command concerned, in accordance with paragraph 3d, AR 40-505, 
September 1, 1942; for personnel on duty in the departments, to the department 
surgeon; and for personnel on duty in military establishments beyond the con- 
tinental limits of the United States, to the force surgeon. The request for refrac- 
tion will be approved in reasonable amount only and will include the adjustment of 
frames and fitting of spectacles when delivered. Authority for the employment of 
a civilian physician for refraction will not be granted to military and other 
authorized personnel who are under orders to report in the near future to a station 
where Army facilities are available. Authority for the employment of a civilian 
physician for refraction of eyes will not be granted to military or other authorized 
personnel absent temporarily for short periods from their proper stations where Army 
facilities are available. 
Section III - Page 2 RULES AND POLICIES 
5. PROCUREMENT AND ISSUE OF EYEGLASSES AT HOME STATIONS - Commanding officers 
of all posts, camps, and stations will make every effort to procure and issue at 
home stations as early as possible in the training period, spectacles, commercial 
type, to military and other authorized personnel requiring eyeglasses, in order to 
preclude mass requests for ophthalmic examination and procurement of spectacles at 
personnel replacement depots or staging areas in the event such personnel are ordered 
to staging areas for transfer to overseas duty. Strict compliance with this 
paragraph is necessary to avoid military personnel proceeding to oversea stations 
without the necessary eyeglasses in their possession. 
6- ELIMINATION OF 1/8 DICFTERS IN PRESCRIBING - Effective upon receipt of this 
pamphlet, medical officers refracting personnel entitled to eyeglasses will not 
prescribe lenses in 1/8 diopter variations. 
7. NEW LENSES FOR CHANGE OF PRESCRIPTION - Authority is granted to procure new 
lenses by prescription in cases where it is necessary to change the power of the 
lenses. 
8. SHIPMENT AND PACKING - In the event spectacles, commercial type, are 
received from optical branches, by posts, camps, or stations within the continental 
limits of the United States to be issued to military or other authorized personnel 
who have been assigned to oversea duty, the packing of such eyeglasses for shipment 
to APO addresses will be as follows: 
a. Each individual pair of eyeglasses with case will be wrapped in a package 
or box for shipment, showing on the face thereof the name, serial number, grade, and 
APO address of the person for whom it is intended. 
b. The individual package will then be placed in one large package or box and 
mailed to the respective APO address. The procedure as outlined will eliminate 
unnecessary work on the part of the Army post office and all shipments will be hand- 
led more expeditiously. 
9. SPECTACLE MAILING BOXES - Spectacle mailing boxes are stocked at the St. 
Louis Medical Supply Depot, St. Louis, Mo., being identified as Item No. 9N071-00, 
and are to be used as containers for eyeglasses being mailed personnel who have 
departed from their station prior to receipt of eyeglasses. Requisitions for this 
item will be forwarded to the Surgeon General, caution being used to requisition 
such moderate quantities as the demand necessitates. Spectacle mailing boxes will 
not be purchased from the branch offices of the optical companies under contract. 
10. DISPOSITION OF EYEGLASSES WHEN ADERESS OF INDIVIDUAL IS UNKNOWN - When 
eyeglasses are received after the individual for whom they are intended has been 
transferred and every effort has been made without success to determine the correct 
address to which the eyeglasses should be forwarded, inquires for the correct address 
may be made of The Adjutant General. 
11. CHANGE OF * RECEIPT OF PURCHASE" ON W.D. . M.D. FORM NO. 130 (SPECTACLE 
ORDER FORM) - a. All posts, camps, and stations presently or hereafter holding 
prescriptions due tohesitancy in signing the receipt of purchase certificate because 
of lack of information that the eyeglasses have actually been received by the 
personnel for whom they were intended will alter the aforementioned certificate as 
authorized in b below, affix signature, and forward the prescriptions for payment. 
b. The certificate of the "Receipt of Purchase" on W.D. , M.D. Form No. 130 
will be changed from-- 
Section III - Page 3 RULES AND POLICIES 
♦ ♦ ♦ that they have been delivered to the above mentioned military per- 
sonnel * ♦ ♦ 
to- - 
* * * and will be delivered to the above mentioned military personnel ♦ ♦ * 
c. Certain changes of W.D. , M.D. Form No. 130 are being contemplated and the 
provisions of b above will be included. 
12. VOUCHERS AND PRESCRIPTIONS - The subject of vouchers and prescriptions for 
stations in various localities and for personnel on duty without troops is covered 
in section IV. 
13. CLASSIFICATION OF SPECTACLES. COMMERCIAL AND GAS MASK TYPE. AS IN- 
DIVIDUALS* PERSONAL EFFECTS * Spectacles, commercial type, and spectacles, gas 
mask type, are classified as the individuals' personal effects, and inasmuch as 
these items are considered expendable supplies, they will not be taken up on the 
stock record account. 
14. INFORMATION NOT TO BE DIVUIGRn - Information in connection with contracts 
for the supply and repair of eyeglasses for military and other authorized personnel, 
especially information in regard to the charges thereunder, will not be divulged to 
any military personnel, civilian employees of the United States Government, or any 
other individuals, with the exception of such military personnel and/or civilian 
employees of the United States Government as require the information for the 
execution of their duties. 
15. AGE AND VISUAL ACUITY OF INDIVIDUAL TYPED ON W.D. . M.D. FORM NO. 130 - 
In preparation of W.D. , M.D. Form No. 130 (Spectacle Order Form) for procurement of 
eyeglasses of any type issued by the Government, the age of the individual concerned 
will be typed opposite the name, and the visual acuity (without glasses) of the 
right eye, left eye, and both eyes will be shown in the last column opposite 
'Dec. In." The letter "R" may be used for right eye; "L" for left eye; and "B" for 
both eyes. When W.D. , M.D. Form No. 130 is revised, space will be provided for these 
data. These procedures are necessary for statistical purposes anrl must be complied 
with. 
16. ALL INFORMATION ON W.D. . M.D. FORM NO. 130 TO BE TRANSCRIBED TO CARBON 
COPIES - All information contained on the original of the contractor's bill on W.D. , 
M.D. Form No. 130 (Spectacle Order Form) will be transcribed to the carbon copies, 
and this will include the invoice number and the branch office identification number 
of the contractor, as omission of the latter seriously interferes with accounting 
procedure. 
17. DAILY FORWARDING OF FORMS TO OPTICAL COMPANIES UNEER CONTRACT - Posts, 
camps, and stations procuring spectacles, commercial type will forward requisitions 
on W.D. , M.D. Form No. 130 to the branch office of the optical company concerned 
for processing at the end of each day and not accumulate such forms for transmittal 
at various periods. The practice of forwarding forms daily will expedite the de- 
livery of eyeglasses. 
18. PERMANENT RECORD OF PRESCRIPTION FOR EYEGLASSES - In order to facilitate 
the replacement of lost or broken lenses and spectacle frames, a permanent record 
will be made of pertinent data regarding the prescription for lenses and spectacle 
frames furnished officers and enlisted men, together with the visual acuity, both 
with and without lenses, the date and place of refraction, and date and place of 
issue. In the case of officer, these data will be entered on W.D. , M.D. Form No. 81 
Section III - Page 4 RULES AND POLICIES 
(Immunization Register), and in the case of enlisted personnel on page 15, W. D. , 
A.G.O. Form No. 24 (Service Record). Effective upon receipt of this pamphlet, a 
copy of the prescription and frame specification will be given to the individual, 
and he will be instructed to keep this copy on his person at all times* This is 
necessary to avoid refraction of eyes each time spectacles are lost or broken. A 
standard form for this purpose is contemplated. However, in the meantime, eye 
clinics and station hospitals will use any form they may have adaptable for this 
purpose. 
SECTION II 
SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE, AND SPECTACLES, GAS MASK TYPE 
Par. 
Use of spectacles, commercial type, and spectacles, gas mask type 19 
Personnel entitled to eyeglasses. ....... 20 
Basis of issue 21 
Specifications 22 
Tinted and especially shaped lenses 23 
Replacement and repairs; optical repair and replacement units . 24 
19. USE OF SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE. AND SPECTACLES. GAS MASK TYPE - 
a. Spectacles, commercial type, are to be used for ordinary wear. 
b. In recent tests of the spectacles, gas mask type, beneath the gas mask, it 
was determined that their use in conjunction with the gas mask was impracticable 
because of the lack of perfect adjustment of the temples, which created discomfort 
and leakage of gas. In view of the foregoing, all unit commanders will be respon- 
sible for directing military and other personnel under their command who are in 
possession of a pair of spectacles, gas mask type, that such spectacles will not be 
used beneath the gas mask, but only as an auxiliary pair of spectacles for ordinary 
wear. In view of the above, Contract No. W 709 and 270, July 1, 1942 is being 
terminated and the requisitioning of spectacles, gas mask type, is to be dis- 
continued immediately upon receipt of this pamphlet. 
c. A substitute eyeglass for use beneath the gas mask is being developed, and 
when its practicability has been determined instructions on this subject will be 
issued. 
20, PERSONNEL ENTITLED TO EYEGLASSES. 
PERSONNEL 
SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE 
a. Officers and enlisted men of the 
If entitled in accordance with pa- 
United States Army, including 
ragraph21, two pairs of spec- 
Army nurses, members of the Wo- 
tacles, commercial type. 
men’s Army Auxiliary Corps, and 
other militarized female person- 
nel of the Army. 
b. Warrant officers 
Do. 
c. Cadets, United States Military 
Academy 
Do. 
Section III - Page 5 RULES AND POLICIES 
PERSONNEL 
SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE 
d. 
Aviation cadets. Army Air 
If entitled in accordance with 
Forces 
paragraph 21, two pairs of 
spectacles, commercial type. 
e. 
Contract surgeons (full time 
of the Army 
Do, 
f. 
Prisoners (United States 
Array personnel) in military 
Do, 
g» 
National Guardsmen in active 
Federal service 
Do, 
h. 
Reserve officers on extended 
active duty with the Army . 
Do, 
i. 
Reserve enlisted men on ex- 
tended active duty with the 
Army. .... 
Do, 
j. 
Retired military personnel 
on active duty with the 
Army 
Do, 
k. 
Members of the organized 
military forces of the 
Government of the Common- 
wealth of the PhilHpines 
in the service of the armed 
forces of the United States, 
Do. 
1. 
Authorized military personnel 
of any country, the defense 
of which the President 
deems vital to the defense 
of the United States, when 
such authorized personnel 
are stationed within the 
forty-eight States and the 
District of Columbia, and 
military personnel, where 
ever located, of all 
cobelligerent countries 
who cannot reasonably obtain 
eyeglasses or replacement 
and repair thereof from 
facilities of their own 
country 
Do. 
m. 
Such civilian employees of 
the War Department on 
military missions overseas 
as require eyeglasses for 
the performance of their 
dities 
Authorized for repair and re- 
placement only. 
n» 
Such Red Cross workers on 
military missions overseas 
as require eyeglasses for 
the performance of their 
duties * 
Authorized for repair and re- 
placement only. 
Section III - Page 6 RULES AND POLICIES 
PERSONNEL 
SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE 
o. Internees (prisoners or war 
civilian enemy aliens) under- 
going internment by the War 
Department ... 
One pair of spectacles, 
type, only if entitled 
ance with paragraph 21. 
commerci al 
in accord- 
21» BASIS OF ISSUE - a. Effective upon receipt of this pamphlet the issuance 
of spectacles, commercial type will be limited to authorired personnel requiring a 
correction of more than one diopter in the meridian of greatest defect except when 
in the judgment of the prescribing officer eyeglasses are absolutely necessary due 
to the age of the individual or to the type of military duty to be performed. Such 
personnel will be issued two pairs of eyeglasses as promptly as possible after 
entrance into the service, with the exception of internees (prisoners of war and 
civilian enemy aliens), who will be issued only one pair provided a correction of 
more than one diopter is required. 
b. The procedure heretofore followed involving the deferred issuance of the 
second pai r of eyeglasses until an individual is under oversea orders is discontinued 
entirely, and the initial and auxiliary pair of eyeglasses are to be issued simulta- 
neously ps early as possible in the training period. 
c. For special cases requiring unusually close work for which bifocals are 
not adapted, the number of pairs of spectacles to be issued will be determined by 
the prescribing officer. 
22. SPECIFICATIONS ' Spectacles, commercial type will conform to specifica- 
tions issued by The Surgeon General, that is, spectacles issued by the American 
Optical Company or by any other optical company designated or authorired by The 
Surgeon General. If military or other authorired personnel desire eyeglasses not 
conforming to the above, such eyeglasses must be purchased by the personnel con- 
cerned, and Government funds may not be used for either whole or part payment 
the reof. 
23. TINTED AND ESPECIALLY SHAPED LENSES - The purchase of tinted and especially 
shaped lenses is not authorired except in connection with repairs as covered by 
paragraph 24. 
24. REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRS; OPTICAL REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT UNITS - a. Before 
spectacles, coimercial type, or spectacles, gas mask type, are replaced or repaired, 
the responsible officer will assure himself that loss or breakage was in the 
performance of military or official duty and that no carelessness was involved. 
Complete replacement will be limited to those individuals entitled to spectacles 
in accordance with the basis of issue as set forth in- paragraph 21. Instances of 
losses or breakages in excess of three per year will be especially investigated and 
reported with recommendation to The Surgeon General if in continental United States; 
to the department or force surgeon concerned in the case of military establishments 
beyond the continental limits of the United States* On review of the evidence The 
Surgeon General, the department surgeon, or the force surgeon will determine 
whether replacement or repair will be made at public expense. Repairs of breakages 
in the performance of duty will be further governed by the following instructions: 
(1) If one lens only is broken, replacement in kind will be made, pro- 
vided the individual’s frame is of durable construction with rims 
and temples, decision as to durability to rest with the responsible 
medical officer. If the frame is not durable, new spectacles 
according to specifications and with untinted lenses will be issued. 
Section III - Page 7 RULES AND POLICIES 
(2) If both lenses are broken replacement will be made by untinted 
lenses per eyeglass specification, these to be placed in the 
individual’s eyeglass frame, provided the frame is of durable 
construction with rims and temples, decision as to durability to 
rest with the station surgeon. If the frame is not durable, new 
spectacles, according to specifications and with untinted lenses, 
will be issued. 
(3) A frame, if broken, will be repaired provided it is of durable 
construction with rims and temples, decision as to durability to 
rest with the responsible medical officer. If the frame is not 
durable, new spectacles according to specifications and with un- 
tinted lenses will be furnished. 
b. Optical repair and replacement units have been and are being made available 
in the various theaters of operation, and whenever possible these facilities should 
be used for the above purposes. 
Section III 
FITTING AND REPAIR CASES 
Par, 
Fitting and repair cases, 25 
Requests for fitting and repair cases 26 
Replacement of used or damaged articles in fitting and repair cases 27 
Fitting and repair case for eyeglasses to be worn beneath a gas mask. .... 28 
25, FITTING AND REPAIR CASES - The following fitting and repair case is 
stocked in the St, Louis Medical Supply Depot, St, Louis, Mo, , and is issued upon 
requisition to the Surgeon General: Item 36275, Case, spectacle fitting and repair 
(for spectacles, commercial type), 
26, REQUESTS FOR FITTING AND REPAIR CASES - a. Requests in the form of 
requisitions by stations within the continental limits of the United States will 
be made direct to The Surgeon General, 
b. Requests in the form of requisitions by stations beyond the continental 
limits of the United States will be made direct to The Surgeon General through the 
department or force surgeon concerned, 
27, REPLACEMENT OF USED OR DAMAGED ARTICLES IN FITTING AND REPAIR CASES - a. 
The necessary replacement of used or damaged articles in spectacle fitting and 
repair cases, such as pliers, tap holders, taps, temples, temple screws, nose pads, 
end piece screws, etc*, should be procured on W,D., M.D, Form No, 130 
b. Charges for these purchases will be handled in the same manner as charges 
incurred for the purchase of eyeglasses. 
28, FITTING AND REPAIR CASE FOR EYEGLASSES TO EE WORN BENEATH A GAS MASK - 
When an eyeglass for use beneath a gas mask is developed, instructions covering the 
procurement of a fitting and repair case for this type eyeglass will be issued^ 
Section III - Page 8 RULES AND POLICIES 
Section IV 
PROCEDURE APPLICABLE TO STATIONS IN VARIOUS LOCALITIES AND TO MILITARY 
AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ON DUTY WITH AND WITHOUT TROOPS IN 
CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES AND IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES 
Stations within continental limits of United States 29 
Military and other authorized personnel without troops in continental United 
States 30 
Alaska; Hawaii; Panama, Rierto Rican, and Trinidad sectors of Caribbean Defense 
Command; Newfoundland; Greenland and Iceland 31 
Military and other authorized personnel on duty without troops in foreign 
countries 32 
Par, 
29. STATIONS WITHIN CONTINENTAL LIMITS OF UNITED STATES - For stations within 
the continental limits of the United States, the following will apply: 
a. Orders for eyeglasses will be placed by a medical officer as heretofore on 
W.D., M.D, Form No. 130, 
b. Upon receipt of spectacles from the contractor, together with the original of 
Form No, 130, the receipt of purchase should be executed by a commissioned or warrant 
officer and forwarded, together with three copies executed as provided in paragraph 
16 direct to the appropriate fiscal branch office. 
30. MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL WITHOUT TROOPS IN CONTINENTAL 
UNITED STATES - If refraction is necessary and no medical officer is available, 
request for authority to employ a civilian physician will be made to the commanding 
general of the service command concerned in accordance with paragraph 3d, AR 40-505, 
September 1, 1942. See paragraph 4, 
31, ALASKA; HAWAII; PANAMA, PUERTO RICAN, AND TRINIDAD SECTORS OF CARIBBEAN 
DEFENSE COMMAND; NEWFOUNDLAND; GREENLAND AND ICELAND - Military and other authorised 
personnel stationed at such places as mentioned will be governed in the issuance of 
spectacles, commercial type, by the provision of paragraph 21, 
32. MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ON DUTY WITHOUT TROOPS IN FOREIGN 
COUNTRIES - For such personnel, the following instructions will apply: 
a. Prior authority for the refraction of eyes will not be required. Accounts 
for such services at reasonable rates will be paid locally. 
b. Spectacles, commercial type - Authority is granted for local procurement at 
reasonable rates, frames to be of durable construction with rims and temples, payment 
Section III - Page 9 RULES AND POLICIES 
for which will be made locally. However, the above applies only if personnel are 
entitled thereto as provided by paragraph 21. 
(A.G. 413.75 (4-3-43).) 
By order of The Secretary of War: 
G. C. MARSHALL, 
Chief of Staff. 
OFFICIAL: 
J. A. ULIO, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General. 
A TRUE COPY 
S. E. LaRose 
2nd Lt. Med. Adm. C. 
Section III - Page 10 RULES AND POLICIES 
(W40-18-43) 
WAR DEPARTMENT 
The Adjutant General’s Office 
Washington 25, D.C. 
MEMORANDUM ) 
NO. W40-18 -43) 
28 July 1943. 
BASIS OF ISSUE OF SPECTACLES 
1. Reference is made to paragraph 21, Pamphlet No. 8-5, War Department, 1943, 
wherein a basis of issue of spectacles is set forth, limiting the issuance of 
spectacles to authorized personnel requiring a correction of more than one diopter 
in the meridian of greatest defect except when in the judgment of the prescribing 
officer eyeglasses are absolutely necessary because of the age of the individual 
or the type of military duty to be performed. 
2. A recent analysis of prescriptions indicates that during the months of May 
and June a disproportionate portion were for lenses of one diopter or less, resulting 
in an over-all total of prescriptions considerably beyond the capacity of existing 
facilities to complete without serious delays. It is apparent that the discretion- 
ary factor has been used rather liberally, and the sharply increased requirements 
for spectacles have resulted in a serious shortage of frames and lenses. Additional 
productive facilities have been called upon to meet increased requirements, but these 
increased supplies cannot be made immediately available. 
3. In view of the above, and in order that personnel who absolutely require 
eyeglasses (those requiring a correction of more than one diopter in the meridian of 
greatest defect) may receive them without undue delay, the following basis of issue 
is effective immediately, superseding the basis of issue set forth in paragraph 21, 
Pamphlet No. 8-5, until sufficient frame and lens stocks are available: 
The issuance of spectacles, commercial type, will be limited to authorized 
personnel requiring a correction of more than one diopter in the meridian of 
greatest defect. Such personnel will be issued two pair of eyeglasses as 
promptly as possible after entrance into the service, with the exception of 
internees (prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens), who will be issued 
only one pair provided a correction of more than one diopter is required. 
Personnel requiring a correction of one diopter or less in the meridian of 
greatest defect will not be issued eyeglasses at Government expense. 
4. With reference to paragraph 18, Pamphlet No. 8-5, prescribing officers are 
charged with the responsibility of determining before spectacles are requisitioned 
whether the respective personnel have previously been furnished with spectacles 
at Government expense, and if so, whether the provisions of paragraph 24, Pamphlet 
No. 8-5, are being complied with. This responsibility may properly be discharged 
by requiring the information in writing from respective unit commanders. 
Section III - Page 11 RULES AND POLICIES 
(W40-18-43) 
(AG 413.75 (23 Jul 43)SPMCJ-MB-E) 
order of the Secretary of War: 
/s/ J.A. Ulio 
J.A. ULIO, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General. 
DISTRIBUTION: 
A. 
A TRUE COPY 
S.E. LaRose 
2nd Lt. Med, Adm. C. 
Section III - Page 12 RULES AND POLICIES 
(W40-18-43, C 1) 
WAR DEPARTMENT 
The Adjutant General's Office 
Washington 25, D.C. 
MEMORANDUM ) 
No. W40-18-43) 
Changes No. 1) 
10 September 1943. 
BASIS OF ISSUE OF SPECTACLES 
Paragraph 3, Memorandum No. W40-18-43, this office, 28 July 1943, subject as 
above, is amended by redesignating the present paragraph 3a and adding b as follows: 
b. This basis of issue is not applicable to military personnel assigned to the 
Army Air Forces. However, prescriptions for such individuals calling for single 
vision lenses of one diopter or less in the meridian of greatest defect will be 
accomplished by a Certificate of Necessity, the original of which will be signed 
in autograph by the prescribing officer, setting forth in brief detail the part- 
icular circumstances which necessitate the furnishing of the correction. Such 
prescriptions not accompanied by this certificate will not be filled by the optical 
companies under contract with the War Department. The Certificate of Necessity will 
be in the following form: 
CERTIFICATE CF NECESSITY 
T£T7 
(Grade) 
(First name, middle initial,last name) 
(Serial No.) 
is a member of the Army Air Forces, and it is necessary that this individual be 
furnished spectacles requiring a correction of one diopter or less in the meridian 
of greatest defect at government expense for the following reasons 
The visual acuity of this individual without glasses is R L 
and with both eyes open 
(Name and grade) 
24-49390 
Section III - Page 13 RULES AND POLICIES 
(W40-18 43, C 1) 
(1) This certificate will be made out in an original and five copies as 
follows: 
(a) The original and one copy to be securely attached to the original 
of W.D., M.D. Form No. 130 (the copy of the certificate to be 
forwarded by the Fiscal Branch Office to the Office of The 
Surgeon General, Washington, D. C., for analysis and review). 
(k) Three carbon copies of the certificate to be attached to three 
copies of Form No. 130. 
(c) The remaining copy to be attached to the copy of the prescription 
which is given to the individual in accordance with paragraph 
18, War Department Pamphlet No. 8-5. 
(2) The service point of the optical company will retain one copy of the 
Form No, 130 with the certificate attached as prescribed above for 
their files. When the Forms No. 130 are forwarded to the Fiscal 
Branch Office for processing for payment, it is important that t lie 
original and one copy of the certificate be attached securely to the 
original of Form No. 130 and the two remaining copies of the cer- 
tificate attached to two copies of the Spectacle Order Form. 
(3) With respect to the foregoing, it is emphasized that corrections of 
one diopter or less in the meridian of greatest defect are to be 
held to a strict minimum and are to be prescribed only in cases 
when absolutely necessary for the performance of mi 1itary duties. 
(AG 413-75 (30 Aug 43) OB-P-SPMDA-MB-A) 
By order of the Secretary of War: 
/s/ J.A. Ulio, 
J.A. ULIO, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General. 
DISTRIBUTION: 
A. 
A TRUE COPY 
S. E. LaRose 
2nd Lt. Med. Adm. C. 
Section III - Page 14 RULES AND POLICIES 
PROCEDURE FOR THE OPERATION OF THE MOBILE. 
BASE AND PORTABLE OPTICAL REPAIR UNITS 
GENERAL - The mobile, base and portable optical repair units were designed for 
the purpose of repair and maintenance of government issue, white metal, rimmed 
spectacles with first quality, white lenses. These optical repair units were not 
intended to repair, replace or fill prescriptions for bifocal lenses, colored 
lenses, rimless spectacles, lenses in 1/8 diopter variations or frames other 
than the government issue, white metal, rimmed spectacle. For that reason, the 
optical repair units will not be furnished with supplies for maintenance of the 
items enumerated above. 
BASIS OF ISSUE AS SET FCRTH IN WAR DEPARTMENT PAMPHLET NO. 8-5, 30 APRIL 1943 
AND WAR DEPARTMENT MEMORANDUM NO. W40-18-43. 28 JULY 1943 
The Optical Advisory Board of The Surgeon General’s Office has determined that 
government issue spectacles would not he given to personnel requiring a correction 
of one diopter or less in the meridian of greatest defect except in unusual cases 
where eyeglasses are absolutely necessary due to the age of the individual or to the 
type of military duty to be performed. The issuance of glasses to such individuals, 
however, must be authorized by the prescribing medical officer, and it will be his 
responsibility to maintain at a minimum such issuances of glasses. 
Personnel entitled to the initial issuance and repair of spectacles by the 
optical repair units are as follows: 
a. Officers and enlisted men of the United States Army, including Army nurses, 
members of the Women’s Army Corps, and other militarized female personnel 
of the Army. 
b. Warrant Officers. 
c. Cadets, United States Military Academy. 
d. Aviation cadets, Army Air Forces. 
e. Contract surgeons (full time) of the Army. 
f. Prisoners (United States Army Personnel) in military custody. 
g. National Guardsmen in active Federal service. 
h. Reserve officers on extended active duty with the Army. 
i. Reserve enlisted men on extended active duty with the Army. 
j. Retired military personnel on active duty with the Army. 
k. Members of the organized military forces of the Government of the Common- 
wealth of the Phillipines in the service of the armed forces of the United 
States. 
l. Authorized military personnel of any country, the defense of which the 
President deems vital to the defense of the United States, when such 
authorized personnel are stationed within the forty-eight States and the 
District of Columbia, and military personnel, wherever located, of all 
cohe11igerent countries who cannot reasonably obtain eyeglasses or 
replacement and repair thereof from facilities of their own country. 
Section III - Page 15 RULES AND POLICIES 
ma Such civilian employees of the War Department on military missions overseas 
as require eyeglasses for the performance of their duties- 
n- Such Red Cross workers on military missions overseas as require eyeglasses 
for the performance of their duties- 
o- Internees (prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens) undergoing intern- 
ment by the War Department- 
FRAMES - Government issue spectacles are composed of a white metal, rimmed, 
spectacle frame and the supplies of frames furnished to the optical repair units 
will be only of the standard type- Supplies will not be furnished for the repair of 
rimless spectacles, and for that reason, any breakage of a rimless spectacle should 
be replaced by one of the standardized type- Breakage of temples and fronts of 
other serviceable, rimmed, metal frames (not of government issue) will be replaced 
with either a new standard temple or front, or complete frame- 
LENSES - The stock of lenses issued for distribution as replacement stock of 
the optical repair units is deemed of sufficiently wide range to insure filling of 
approximately 95% of all prescriptions- Although prescriptions of one diopter and 
less in the meridian of greatest defect are not to be filled except when authorized 
by a medical officer, a moderate supply of low powers is being furnished to take 
care of cases where one lens is one diopter or less but the other is above one 
diopter- Lenses of 1/8 diopter variations are not supplied inasmuch as the Optical 
Advisory Board in The Surgeon General's Office determined that prescriptions in 1/4 
diopter variations would provide adequate and satisfactory corrections and reduce 
the quantity of stock lenses necessary- Furthermore, the Optical Advisory Board of 
The Surgeon General’s Office has agreed that stock foci should be substituted 
when filling a prescription for a foci not carried in stock providing the substitu- 
tion does not amount to more than a 1/4 of a diopter in either the spherical or 
cylindrical powers- For example, a prescription calling for a -7.00 +2,25 may be 
filled by a -7.00 +2.00 which will be carried in stock; +5.25 +2.00 - substitute 
+ 5.00 +2.00; -8.00 -f. 25 - substitute -8.00 sphere. 
Recently, requisitions have been received for a foci and types of lenses and 
ophthalmic materials which are not carried in stock, and such requisitions cannot be 
filled by this office without serious delays- Evidence shows that commanding 
officers of the optical units do not decenter lenses to achieve prismatic effect in 
high powers where it is possible to decenter and thereby effect such desired prism- 
Also, vertex distance is not to be considered in high powered lenses, and such 
effects should be considered whenever feasible to eliminate the need of surface 
grinding- 
Surfacing equipment is being furnished each mobile and base optical unit for 
grinding spherical surfaces, and it is believed that with the stock of rough blanks 
and semi-finished lenses furnished and the surfacing equipment, all the prescriptions 
received by these units can be properly filled- A cylinder surfacing machine was 
not furnished inasmuch as the equipment, machinery and stock of rough blanks 
necessary to do this work would be impracticable in view of the limited need for 
such equipment and because of the fact that the spherical surfacing equipment could 
achieve substantially the same results by using the semi-finished lenses supplied- 
Replacement stocks of semi-finished cylinders from plus -50 to plus 8.00 will be 
furnished upon requi si tion- 
In view of the limited number of requisitions originating for bifocal lenses, 
it is the policy of The Surgeon General’s Office that one piece or fused bifocals 
will not be serviced by the Optical Repair Units- 
Section III - Page 16 RULES AND POLICIES 
In substitution for a bifocal prescription, two pairs of glasses, one reading 
and one distance, will be supplied, or in very exceptional cases where bifocals must 
be supplied or repaired, the surfacing equipment will be used to make opi fex or 
cemented type bifocals. For such cases, a supply of Canada balsam is included. 
In no instance will repairs of spectacles or replacement of lenses include the 
duplicating of the other lens or the initial supply, if such lenses are colored. 
The many different types and shades of colored lenses makes it wholly unfeasible to 
furnish such supplies to Optical Repair Units. Furthermore, no provision for the 
issuance of such colored lenses has been made. 
REQUISITIONING OF FRAMES AND LENSES - Previously, The Surgeon General’s 
Office advised the various mobile and base units that an automatic supply of frames 
and lenses to cover estimated requirements for three month periods would be es- 
tablished. However, this automatic flow program has been disapproved and under the 
existing policy, requisitions must be originated in the various theaters in the 
usual manner for these ophthalmic supplies. Inasmuch as a procurement program has 
been set up for frames and lenses to cover oversea requirements, it is necessary in 
the requisitioning of such ophthalmic supplies that frame sizes and lens foci be 
requisitioned only in such powers as have been placed in procurement and stocked. 
Requisitions should be placed for ophthalmic supplies covering a three month period 
in order that procurement programs may be kept in line with the stocks furnished, 
and it is essential that requisitions be made on this basis. Each requisition shall 
have attached a brief summary of the number of jobs done each month for the previous 
three months, the figures to show separately the total number of repair and the 
total number of complete replacement jobs. Overstocking of ophthalmic supplies on 
the part of mobile and base units can seriously interfere with thestock control, and 
may prove to be a serious handicap in the event the unit is moved from one territory 
to another. 
In order that realistic needs can be requisitioned, some practicable form of 
stock control is recommended in order that more or less accurate requirements can be 
listed. This is necessary in view of the fact that productive facilities in this 
country are being heavily taxed, and accurate planning of the procurement program 
must be effected in order that requisitions placed by the mobile and base optical 
repair units may be filled promptly. With stockpile quantities of expendable 
ophthalmic supplies available for oversea maintenance, there is no need for requisi- 
tioning supplies in excess of actual requirements, and adherence to the recommended 
procedures will minimize delays and procurement difficulties. 
Attached hereto is a chart of the frames and lenses presently available in 
stock for which a procurement program has been initiated. Again, it is emphasized 
that the requisitioning of ophthalmic supplies should be within this range of frames 
and foci of lenses. 
Also attached hereto is list showing the various stocks placed in procurement 
of surfacing supplies and the range of rough blanks and semi-finished meniscus. 
SUMMARY - It is anticipated that the officers in charge of optical repair units 
will recognize the problems involved in the procurement and distribution of ophthal- 
mic supplies in overseas theaters, and that they will cooperate to the fullest 
extent in the program described herein. Any reasonable and constructive suggestions 
for improvement of the program will receive every consideration, and this office 
Section III - Page 17 RULES AND POLICIES 
urges the officers in charge of optical units to submit frequent report of their 
problems. These should be submitted through channels to the Office of The Surgeon 
General and the practice of some officers whereby their needs and criticisms are 
directed to acquaintances in the service or former associates in the optical 
industry or profession is to be discouraged. 
A TRUE COFY 
S. E. LaRose 
2nd Lt. Med. Adm, C. 
Section III - Page 18 AR 345-125 
♦C 22 
MILITARY RECORDS 
SERVICE RECORD 
CHANGES ) 
NO. 22 ) 
WAR DEPARTMENT 
Washington 25, D. C., 22 January 1944 
AR 345-125, 1 February 1932, is changed as follows: 
4, Other data required - a. Such other data required by the printed headings 
on W.D. , A.G.O. Form No. 24, not mentioned in these regulations, will be entered 
from time to time as occasion arises, care being taken to make the records complete 
and up to date at all times, except that no entry will be made on page 2 under 
"Occupational Qualifications" at induction stations and no entries will be made at 
reception centers in case of routine processing under "appointment, promotion, or 
reduction with authority therefor", nor under "Organiration to which attached" on 
page 5. A service record coming into the custody of any officer will be carefully 
scrutinized, and if any entry on the form appears incomplete, steps will be taken 
to secure the necessary data and complete the entry, 
b. Eyeglass, gas mask, M-l (spectacles.) 
(1) A spectacle for use beneath the gas mask, which becomes an integral 
part of the mask to which it is fitted, is available for issue in 
the zone of the interior to those individuals entitled to the 
eyeglass; the eyeglass, gas mask, M-l, and size of the proper fitting 
mask, will be entered on page 15 under "Remarks-Administrative," as 
the space on page 2, of the service record, "size of gas mask" is not 
sufficient to enter the above information. 
(2) All conflicting instructions regarding the entry in the service record 
oi the eyeglass, gas mask, M-l, are rescinded. 
(A.G. 201.3 (17 Nov 43)) (C 22. 22 Jan 44.) 
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR: 
G. C. MARSHALL 
Chief of Staff 
OFFICIAL 
J. A. ULIO 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General 
DISTRIBUTION: 
A: E. 
A TRUE COPY 
S. E. LaRose 
2nd Lt., Med. Adm. C. 
♦These changes supersede C 15, 7 June 1943 
Section III - Page 19 (Ci r. 55) 
CIRCULAR ) 
NO. 55 ) 
WAR DEPARTMENT, 
WASHINGTON 25, D.C., 7 February 1944 
IV--SPECTACLES1. Memorandum No. W40-18-43, 28 July 1943, subject Basis of 
Issue of Spectacles, including C 1, 10 September 1943, and paragraphs 18 and 21, 
Pamphlet No. 8-5, War Department, 1943, are rescinded. 
2. Effective immediately, the professional basis of issue of spectacles, 
commercial type, to authorized personnel will be as follows: 
a. To individuals having a visual acuity of worse than 20/100 in either eye. 
b. To other individuals who, in the opinion of the prescribing officer, 
require spectacles for the efficient performance of military duties, regardless 
of their visual acuity. 
c. Personnel entitled to spectacles will be issued two pairs of spectacles 
with the following exceptions: 
(1) Prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens will be issued only one 
pai r each* 
(2) Special cases requiring unusually close work for whi ch bifocals are 
not adapted will be issued the number of pair of spectacles as 
determined by the prescribing officer. 
3. Examination for spectacles will be made as early as possible during the 
basic training period. This examination will include those individuals having 
a visual acuity of worse than 20/40 in either eye and 20/100 or better in each 
eye. The purpose of such examination will be to avoid borderline cases reaching 
staging areas or ports of embarkation without complete examination having been made. 
4. a. Prescribing officers are urged to exercise the discretionary basis 
of issue (par. 2b) with careful judgment in order that spectacles will be furnished 
only when they are necessary for the official performance of military duties. 
b. When a prescription for spectacles is issued for an individual having 
a visual acuity of 2 C/100 or better in each eye, the prescription will be accompanied 
by a certificate of necessity, the original of which will be signed in autograph 
by the prescribing officer setting forth in brief but complete detail the reason 
for furnishing such correction* The optical companies under contract with the 
War Department are not authorized to fill such prescriptions unless accompanied 
by the certificate of necessity. 
c. The certificate of necessity will be in the following form: 
Section III - Page 20 RULES AND POLICIES 
CERTIFICATE OF NECESSITY 
(Station) 
(Date) 
The visual acuity of 
(Grade) (Seri al No.) (First name, middle initial, last) 
without glass is R , L , and with both eyes open , and it is necessary 
that this individual be furnished spectacles at Government expense for the following 
reasons: 
(Name and grade) 
(1) This certificate will be made out in an original and five copies as 
foilows : 
(a) The original and one copy to be securely attached to the original 
of W.D., M.D. Form No, 130 (Spectacles Order), the copy of 
the certificate to be forwarded by the Fiscal Branch Office 
of the Office of The Surgeon General, Washington 25, D. C., 
for analysis and review. 
(b) Three carbon copies of the certificate to be attached to three 
copies of Form No, 130. 
(c) The remaining copy to he attached to the copy of the prescription 
which is given to the individual. See paragraph 5c. 
(2) The service point of the optical company will retain one copy of the 
Form No. 130 with the certificate of necessity attached for their 
files. When the Forms No. 130 are forwarded to the Fiscal Branch 
Office for processing for payment, it is important that the original 
and one copy of the certificate be attached securely to the original 
of Form No. 130 and the two remaining copies of the certificate of 
necessity attached to two copies of the Form No. 130. 
5. In order to facilitate the replacement of lost or broken lenses and 
spectacle frames, a permanent record will be made. In the case of officers, 
these data will be entered on W. D,, M.D. Form No. 81 (Immunization Register), 
and in the case of enlisted personnel, on page 15, W. D,, A. G. O. Form No. 24 
(Service Record). The following data will be made a port of such records: 
a. When in the opinion of the prescribing officer, spectacles are not required, 
entry will be made showing date of examination md stating that spectacles are 
not required for the efficient performance of military duties. 
b. If, after examination it is found that spectacles are required, the fol- 
lowing entries will be made. 
Section III - Page 21 RULES AND POLICIES 
(1) Prescription data. 
(a) Date of refraction. 
(b) Place of refraction. 
(c) Correction required for each eye. 
(d) Size frames and lenses. 
(e) Visual acuity each eye, with and without correction. 
(f) Visual acuity (binocular) with and without correction. 
(2) Issue data. 
(a) Date spectacles ordered. 
(b) Date of issue of spectacles. 
(c) Number pairs spectacles issued to the individual. 
c. A copy of the prescription and frame specifications will be given to the 
individual and he will be instructed to keep this copy on his person at all times. 
This is necessary to avoid refraction of eyes each time spectacles are lost or 
broken. Eye clinics and station hospitals will use any prescription form they 
have adaptable for this purpose. 
6. Prescribing officers are responsible for determining whether the individual 
has previously been furnished spectacles at Government expense before spectacles 
are ordered. This responsibility can be properly discharged by requiring this 
information in writing from the individual’s commanding officer. See paragraph 5 
and paragraph 24, Pamphlet No. 8-5, War Department, 1943. 
7. Commanding officers of posts, camps, and stations are responsible for 
establishing proper local procedures for the issuance of spectacles. 
(A.G. 413.75 (31 Jan 44)) 
ORDERS OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR 
G. C. MARSHALL 
Chief of Staff 
OFFICIAL: 
J. A. ULIO, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General 
A TRUE COPY 
S. E. LaROSE 
2nd Lt., Med. Adm, C. 
Section III - Page 22 SECTION IV 
PRESCRIPTION PRESCRIPTIONS 
The prescription form in current use is War Department, Medical Department, 
Form #130, This form is undergoing revision but until such time as the revised form 
becomes an issue, it will be used by field optical repair units although portions of 
the form are only applicable to spectacles processed by civilian firms under govern- 
ment contract. 
When a prescription accompanies spectacles sent to a field unit for repair or 
replacement it is advisable to neutralize the lenses to determine if they are in 
agreement with the prescription. If they are not in agreement and the prescription 
does not indicate a recent refraction, the optical officer should be contacted and 
advised as to the discrepancy. The optical officer will contact the source of 
origin of the prescription if practicable or make a notation on the prescription as 
to which lenses were supplied and the reason for so doing. 
Spectacles received without a prescription will be accurately duplicated. 
Frequently only a fragment of a piano or sphero cylinder lens will be presented for 
replacement and it will test the operators skill to determine the correct meridian 
of the axis. The duplicating of lenses for a government issue frame will not be as 
difficult as a similiar duplication for a gas mask insert due to the difference in 
the shape of the lenses. It is therefore mandatory that the 180° line of each 
round lens be accurately marked. The two most satisfactory methods of so marking a 
lens are by a diamond mark on the lens or a file mark on the bevel of the lens. 
Either of these methods will in no way impair the vision nor weaken the lens and 
will serve as a guide for subsequent lens replacements. 
The original prescription will be returned with the processed spectacles. It 
is advisable to maintain a record book in which each prescription is entered and 
given a number as it will be of assistance in the proper control of the unit stock. 
It has been found inadvisable to use the original prescription as a work order as it 
might lose its legibility due to saturation by water, rough or emery. 
Extreme care must be exercised in transferring the original prescription to a 
work order. The changing of a plus or minus sign or a decimal point will cause the 
selection of an improper lens and will necessitate the reprocessing of the lenses. 
If time permits, the practice of checking lens foci in the lensometer is 
advisable. Occasionally lenses are placed in the wrong envelope and this fact 
should be determined before, rather than after the glasses have been completed. 
The work copy of the prescription will then be placed in a tray and the proper 
lenses, fronts, temples, etc., will be selected from stock. These items will be 
deducted on the stock record cards. (Some unit commanders may not maintain such 
cards as the method of stock control is optional.) There is, of course, no account- 
ability for mobile unit stock but there is the usual responsibility and the unit 
commander will establish some form of stock control. The maintaining of a stock 
record account similiar to that kept by an accountable office is recommended. 
Substitution of lenses must be approved by the unit or installation optical 
officer unless such authority has been delegated to a member of the unit personnel. 
In the selection of spectacle fronts, one with sufficient stock in the bridge for 
proper bending will be selected from stock when the size indicated on the prescri- 
tion is depleted. Temples may be cut to the desired length and a drop of solder 
placed on the end to prevent the cable from ravelling. If pressed for time the 
temple may merely be turned back to the desired length. Temples (gas mask type) if 
available, may be substituted for regular temples. 
Section IV - Page 1 PRESCRIPTIONS 
The work order accompanied by the properly selected items will then proceed 
through the regular work channels. (Marking, cutting, edging, assembling and 
inspect ion.) 
A record of breakage must be maintained in order that proper deductions from 
the stock records may be made. This record is also of value in determining the 
efficiency of the technical personnel. Although every effort will be made to 
eliminate breakage, a reasonable amount of stock loss is expected from this source. 
The use of breakage slips, which must be presented to obtain replacement material, 
has been found effective. 
The final inspection of the completed spectacles should be made from the 
original prescription rather than the work order. It is obvious that by so doing, 
errors that occurred during the transferring of the prescription to the work order 
will be determined. 
For the guidance of the personnel of field optical repair units, the following 
is quoted: 
Paragraph 6, War Department Pamphlet No. 8-5. 
"Elimination of 1/8 diopters in prescribing.--Effeetive upon receipt of this 
pamphlet, medical officers refracting personnel entitled to eyeglasses will not 
prescribe lenses in 1/8 diopter variations." 
Paragraphs 1, 2, and 3, Memorandum (W40-18-40) the Office of the Adjutant 
General, 28 July 1 943. 
*1. Reference is made to paragraph 21, Pamphlet No. 8-5, War Department, 1943, 
wherein a basis of issue of spectacles is set forth limiting the issuance of 
spectacles to authorized personnel requiring a correction of more than one diopter 
in the meridian of greatest defect except when in the judgment of the prescribing 
officer eyeglasses are absolutely necessary because of the age of the individual or 
the type of military duty to be performed. 
2. A recent analysis of prescriptions indicates that during the month of May 
and June a disproportionate portion were for lenses of one diopter or less, result- 
ing in an over-all total of prescriptions considerably beyond the capacity of 
existing facilities to complete without serious delays. It is apparent that the 
discretionary factor has been used rather liberally, and the sharply increased 
requirements for spectacles have resulted in a serious shortage of frames and lenses. 
Additional productive facilities have been called upon to meet increased require- 
ments, but these increased supplies cannot be made immediately available. 
3. In view of the above, and in order that personnel who absolutely require 
eyeglasses (those requiring a correction of more than one diopter in the meridian 
of greatest defect) may receive them without undue delay, the following basis of 
issue is effective immediately, superseding the basis of issue set forth in para- 
graph 21, Pamphlet No. 8-5, until sufficient frame and lens stocks are available: 
The issuance of spectacles, commercial type, will be limited to authorized 
personnel requiring a correction of mere than one diopter in the meridian of 
greatest defect. Such personnel will be issued two pair of eyeglasses as 
promptly as possible after entrance into the service, with the exception of 
internees (prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens), who will be issued only 
one pair provided a correction of more than one diopter is required. Personnel 
requiring a correction of one diopter or less in the meridian of greatest 
defect will not be issued eyeglasses at Government expense." 
Section IV - Page 2 PRESCRIPTIONS 
If any doubt exists as to the contents of an optical prescription it should be 
referred to the optical officer for decision. 
The efficiency of a field optical repair unit will be judged by the quantity 
and quality of the work it produces. The careful copying, transposing or interpre- 
tation of a prescription would be a factor in acquiring the efficiency required of 
Army Optical repair Uiits in the field. 
Section IV - Page 3 SECTION V 
FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
The lens, as understood in the prescription shop, is a piece of glass bounded 
on the front and back by polished surfaces and surrounded in all other directions by 
an edge. The surfaces may be flat, spherical, cylindrical, toric or aspheric, as 
the conditions require. 
The lens is supported in position before the eye by a piece of apparatus known 
as a frame. The frame in turn is supported by some one or more of the facial 
features. 
The lens as worn before the eye serves one or both of two purposes. It may be 
worn (1) for the protection of the eyes, (2) as a help to vision. This course is 
concerned only with the latter. 
The polished surfaces of the lens are its refracting equipment - are, in fact, 
what makes the lens useful as a lens. The lens has two general classifications: 
1. Convex or plus (+) lenses 
2. Concave or minus (-) lenses 
(See Diagram MSSS I - 0-104) 
The unit of measurement used to express the power or focus of a lens is a 
diopter. A 1.00 diopter lens has a focal length of one meter or 39.37 inches. To 
find the equivalent of diopters in inches, divide 39.37 by the number of diopters. 
To find the equivalent of inches in diopters, divide 39.37 by the focal length in 
inches. The focal length in millimeters is found by dividing 1,000 by the number of 
diopters. MSSS Chart A-104 gives the accurate equivalents for the common powers. 
The focus is the point where all lines converge or meet. 
As the power of a lens increases, the focal length becomes shorter. 
Light rays always bend toward the thicker portion of the lens. 
Spherical or Meniscus lenses have the same power in all directions. 
OBLIQUE 
HORIZONTAL 
VERTICAL 
There are four general types of spherical lenses: 
PLUS LENSES 
1. Double convex (DCX) 
2. Plano convex (PL-CX) 
3. Periscopic convex (PCX) 
4. Meniscus convex (MEN or MCX) 
Section V - Page 1 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
MINUS LENSES 
1. Double concave (DCC) 
2. Plano concave (PL-CC) 
3. Persicopic concave (PCC) 
4. Meniscus concave (MOC) 
(See Diagram MSSS I - 104) 
The base curve of a lens is that curve from which all others are computed. 
For example: If you required a-1-2.00 D lens which has a base curve of -6.00 D, 
it would be necessary to grind a+8.00 D curve on the plus side to obtain the 
desired power. A base curve of -1.25 D would require an outside curve of+3. 25 D. 
A + 1.00 D base curve would require the grinding of a+1.00 D curve on the opposite 
side, etc. 
A cylinder lens is by definition a lens, one of whose surfaces is a portion of 
a cylindrical surface. Bearing in mind that curvature controls the power of a lens, 
it can be visualized that each meridian of a cylinder lens has a different power. 
However, we are only concerned with the principal meridians, of which there would be 
two, the meridian with the least power and the meridian with the greatest power. 
For example: The two principal meridians of a -+‘2.00 D Piano-cylinder would be 
Plano in the lesser meridian and +2.00 in the greatest meridian. 
The cylinder lens can be combined with a sphere producing a sphero-cylinder or 
compound lens. A+2.00 D Sphere combined with+2.00 D cylinder would produce the 
following principal meridians: 
+ 2.00 in the lesser and+4.00 in the greater. The lesser meridian giving the 
spherical power and the greater giving the combined power of the sphere and cy- 
linder. The difference between the lesser meridian and the greater meridian would 
be the cylindrical power of the lens. 
The power of a lens and the focal length of a lens convey the same information; 
one is the reciprocal of the other. Either one of these terms describes how much 
the lens converges or diverges parallel rays of light which enter the lens parallel 
to the axis. Either one fixes the point on the axis where the rays of light come to 
a focus, real or virtual, as the case may be. Now to define this point we must have 
some fixed point of reference from which to measure and it is evidently some point 
common to the lens and the optic axis. 
It is commonly understood, when we say that the power of a lens is+ 1.00 D, 
that the light from a distant source comes to a focus at a point one meter from the 
lens. This is often a sufficiently accurate statement, for we may not care to know 
the power within close limits of error or may be discussing a theoretical lens in- 
finitely thin. But suppose we have a lens of commercial thickness and wish to know 
the power accurately. From what point of the lens shall we measure, from a surface 
or from some point inside the lens? For some purposes we use the rear surface as 
the point of reference. The distance to the focus is called the "back focus". In 
some cases, we use a point inside the lens vhich is one of the two "principal points'1 
of the lens, points whose positions depend upon the shape of the lens. The distance 
from the second principal point to the secondary focus is called the equivalent 
focal length of the lens or the E. F. L. And we shall find later that the distance 
from the front surface to the primary focus, or "front focal length", as it is 
called, is the reciprocal of the neutralizing power. 
Section V - Page 2 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
POWER OF A SPECTACLE LENS 
There are four current expressions for power which should be clearly understood. 
APPROX IMATE POWER - Let Dj be the power of the front surface and 
D2 be power or rear surface. Then is a good approximation to the power 
of thin lens. It is found in all elementary text books and therefore is in current 
use among students. For accurate work and for thick lenses this approximation is 
not good enough. 
EQUIVALENT POWER - In more advanced optical work power is commonly expressed 
as the reciprocal of the equivalent focal length. The term "equivalent power" 
distinguishes this definition from the others by a properly qualifying adjective. 
Equivalent focal length is a very useful conception and has an important application 
to a compound lens system, for it tells us where a single thin lens could be placed 
to give the same size of image. We shall endeavor to show the "equivalent power" 
which has been employed extensively in spectacle work is a less useful quantity 
than "effective power" as defined below. 
EFFECTIVE POWER - The development and improvement in the design of spectacle 
lenses and trial sets has led to the introduction of the "back focus" and its re- 
ciprocal, "effective power". This is sometimes called "vertex refraction," which is 
a translation of the German "scheitol refraction," introduced by von Rohr. While 
the term "vertex refraction" is due to von Rohr (1912), the significance of the back 
focus was recognized much earlier. As early as 1908 the Optical Society (London) 
adopted the report of its Optical Standards Committee on the Standardization of 
Trial Cases in which the enclosed table gives not only the power of the trial 
lenses, but also the back focal length. We shall use the expression "effective 
power" and in the course of this paper we hope to justify the preference. 
NEUTRALIZING POWER - We are all familiar with the practice of neutraliza- 
tion upon which the shopman relies so much. The basic idea of neutralization is 
very simple. For example, the shopman makes a -2D lens. He holds it against a+2D 
lens from the trial set. If the combination shows no power he is satisfied that the 
—2D lens is ground correctly. For weak powers this practice is without question; 
for higher powers it is readily proved that neutralization is not, in general, 
justified. In the report of the Standardization Committee referred to above, the 
use of trial lenses for neutralization purposes is carefully discussed. At that 
time the demand from manufacturers and others to maintain a neutralization basis for 
trial sets was so insistent that the following recommendation was offered and 
accepted. The negative lenses (bi-concave) were marked with their real "equivalent 
powers" and the positive lenses (bi-convex) were marked with corresponding "nomi- 
nal" powers but were ground so as to neutralize the negatives. For example: A -20D 
lens was neutralized by a+20D lens, of which the true equivalent power was ■f'18.83 D. 
A statement giving the true powers of the standard positives was required to be 
pasted in each trial case. 
NUMERICAL COMPARISONS 
There are some single formulae for the calculation of equivalent power, ef- 
fective power and neutralizing power. They are so simple in form that it is easy to 
make instructive comparisons showing upon what the numerical differences depend. 
(1) Equivalent Power = Dj+‘ D2 - gDj D2 
(2) Effective Power = "** * * * 
(3) Neutralizing Power sD1‘hD2't" * * 
Section V - Page 3 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
Dj — power of front surface 
= power of rear surface 
s r center thickness 
index of refraction 
The first formula is rigid; the other two are not. Each succeeding term of (2) 
and (3) beyond the third is smaller than the one preceding. In all but the higher 
powers the first three terms are sufficient. Effective power and neu tral i zing power 
can each be expressed by rigid formulae, but the forms given here serve better for 
the comparisons which we wish to make. In the numerical tables following the next 
term was included. 
All three formulae contain D+D2, i*e*J the sum the powers of the front and 
rear surfaces, and the remaining term shows how much the power differs from this 
approximate expression which is so often used. Let us then consider the third term 
in each. 
It is evident from the term — sD^D2 in equation (1) that equivalent power 
depends upon the thickness and the powers of the two surfaces, but parallel light 
can enter from either side and the equivalent power remains the same. This may, at 
first sight, seem to be an advantage, but it will be shown later, from figures, that 
the power is the same because in one case it is measured from the second principal 
point and in the other from the first principal point. 
We see from equation (2) that the third term is independent of the rear sur- 
face. Evidently then, effective power varies with the shape of the lens. If we 
reverse the direction from which parallel light enters, we change the effective 
powe r. 
Similarly, the third term in (3) is independent of the front surface and varies 
with the shape of the lens. In fact there is a relation between (2) and (3). If we 
write Dj for D2 and D2 for Dj throughout in (3) we have (2). In other words, the 
neutralizing power of a lens is equal to its effective power when the lens is re- 
versed. Suppose we have three positive lenses, the sum of the powers of the two 
surfaces being *+* 16, one a bi-convex, another convexo-plane, and the third a menis- 
cus with a —6 on the rear surface. The following short table shows what must be 
added to 4-16 to give equivalent power, effective power, and neutralizing power, 
respectively. 
RCSS Chart # K-0-104 is a large table showing these quantities, from which it 
can be seen how they vary with the power of the lens and with the shape of the lens. 
Using the same example, a meniscus with rear surface -6 and front surface 422, 
= 4*16. The effective power differs from4l6 by-f2.30D, its equivalent power 
is 0.57 greater and its neutralizing power is 0,15 greater. Evidently the effective 
power is 2.15 D greater than its neutralizing power; i.e., a meniscus —6, whose 
effective power is 418.30 would neutralize a lens whose effective power is—16.15 
when the convex side of the meniscus is one of the contact surfaces. 
Accompanying this article are given six figures corresponding to cases Dj4D2 ~ 
+■16 and Dj + D2 = —16 in the tabulation given in MSSS Chart # K-O-104. In each case 
parallel light enters from the left; F is the secondary focus and H* the secondary 
principal plane. Similarly F and H are the primary focus and first principal plan 
respectively. Let us come back to the fundamental distinctions between the defini- 
tions for equivalent power, effective power, and neutralizing power. 
Section V - Page 4 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
Bi-Convex 
Convexo-Plane 
Meni scus—6 
Equivalent power 
Effective " 
Neutralizing " 
-0.28 
+0.28 
+ 0. 28 
0.00 
+ 1.18 
0.00 
+0.57 
+ 2.30 
+ 0. 15 
In any elementary text-book figures similar to figure 1 are given, showing the 
lens, the two foci, and the two principal planes. The primary focus F is the point 
from which the light of a point source diverging and entering the lens is rendered 
parallel upon emergence. The point F* , the secondary focus, is the point to which 
entering parallel rays converge, or from which they appear to diverge upon emergence. 
The principal planes divide Fig. 1, AA’ into three equal parts and HF = H’F’. Note 
from figures 1, 2, 3, that the principal planes move to the left as the shape of the 
lens changes. Similarly for the concave lenses, figures 4, 5, 6. It is true, in 
each case, as was said above, that the equivalent power is independent of the 
direction of the light, i.e., HF = H’F’ but the planes H and H' are not fixed in 
relation to the lens, and it is clear that if a spectacle lens is measured in terms 
of equivalent power, the position of F’ with respect to the lens depends upon the 
shape of the lens and is measured, in general, from some point within the lens. 
It is for this reason that the back focal length and effective power have grown 
in favor until the best trial sets and lenses are designed and manufactured and 
marked so. Effective power is the reciprocal of A’F’: so we always know, whatever 
the shape of the lens, how far back of the rear surface the focal point is situated. 
Its use implies, of course, that the spectacle shall be worn at some predetermined 
distance in front of the cornea: (this is true in any case). The distance 14 mm. 
has been universally adopted because at this distance magnification of objects is 
uni ty. 
EFFECT UPON THE EYE OF POSITION OF THE LENS - There is a curious custom 
which has a bearing on the question of the proper position of spectacles. It is 
sometimes observed that a person who should wear bifocal glasses lowers his spec- 
tacles for distant vision far down on the bridge of his nose while reading. This 
habit has a simple scientific explanation; the spectacles so worn are stronger in 
effect, as the figure 7 will show. Suppose a lens in position L (figure 7) brings 
light to a focus at F’, which is distant the length AF’ from the point A. If we 
move the lens away from A the focal point moves nearer A; i.e., with respect to that 
point. 
A formula to express this idea of change in power with respect to a point A as 
the lens is moved is found in Laurance, General and Practical Optics, Page 192. It 
will be found upon reading that Laurance uses the term "effective power" also, and 
in a larger sense than is used here, but there is no conflict of definition. He 
makes the statement: "If any lens is in contact with a given plane, then the ef- 
fectivity at that plane is represented by the power of the lens itself". This is 
equally valid whether we think in terms of EFL or back focus. Now in the design 
of spectacles the point A may be at the cornea or at any fixed known distance from 
it. Since the point 14 mm, in front of the cornea has the distinction of giving 
unit magnification, and spectacles are worn at this position, this should be the 
fixed point of reference with respect to which power is measured. Regardless of 
Section V - Page 5 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
the shape of the lens, the position of the focal point in relation to the eye is 
known. In other words, effective power, as we have defined it, gives the true cor- 
rective effect of the lens upon the eye. The lens should be designed for this 
corneal distance, the trial set should be marked with effective powers, the trial 
frame should have adjustment for corneal distance and the spectacles should be worn 
at the same distance. It is just as important to wear a carefully designed lens at 
14 mm, as it is to make the lens calculations for this distance. Suppose a ■+‘10 D 
lens (effective power) is designed to be worn at 14 mm. and is worn at 16 mm. The 
back focus is 100 mm. and an increase of 2 mm. gives an effect upon the eye of 
0.098 “ 10,2D 
MARGINAL POWER - Lens design has now reached the point where the lens er- 
rors near the margin are reduced. Suppose we are concerned with such a design. How 
is "effective power" measured near the margin? In correcting marginal error we are 
concerned with oblique vision or the motion of the eye about its center of rotation. 
Evidently then we should measure back focal length always from a distance 14 mm. 
from the cornea, (27 mm, from the center of rotation), and the effective power is 
then referred, not to a plane, but to a circle of 27 mm. radius. 
EFFECTIVE POWER VS. VERTEX REFRACTION - The expressions "vertex refrac- 
tion" and "effective power" mean the same thing at the center of the lens, but 
vertex refraction can have no meaning, except at the center, for the vertex is the 
intersection of the optic axis and the center of the rear surface. Neither does it 
have as direct a suggestion of meaning. By effective power we mean power so mea- 
sured that it gives directly the corrective effect of the lens upon the eye when it 
is worn at the universally adopted distance of 14 mm. 
RELATION BETWEEN EFFECTIVE POWER AND NEUTRALIZING POWER - Effective and 
neutralizing powers bear a simple relation to each other. That two lenses having a 
common axis shall neutralize, only one condition needs to be fulfilled: namely, 
that the secondary focus of the first shall coincide with the primary focus of the 
second. The lenses may or may not be in contact. (Two negatives cannot be made to 
neutralize because both foci are virtual, but two positives on opposite sides of the 
common focal point will neutralize.) Suppose parallel light enters a positive lens 
and is converging toward F'. Then if a negative lens is placed in the converging 
beam so that its primary focus F coincides with F’, it will render the beam parallel 
upon emergence by definition of primary focus. 
Now neutralization of ophthalmic lenses is always accomplished by holding the 
lenses in contact, hence the second lens must have a front focal distance equal to 
back focal distance of the first lens. Neutralizing power is defined to be the 
reciprocal of the front focal distance. Now front focal length becomes back focal 
length when the lens is reversed, hence neutralizing power is equal to the effective 
power of the lens reversed and a single formula serves for both as mentioned above, 
provided due regard is shown for the interchange of Dj and D^. 
NEUTRALIZATION - In making neutralization tests we have to remember that 
effective power and neutralizing power are numerically interchangeable with reversal 
of the lens and that the front surface of the known lens must be one of the surfaces 
of contact. The other surface of contact will be the rear surface of fhe unknown 
1 ens. 
To bring out the same idea in a somewhat different way: Suppose a bi-concave 
trial lens is used to neutralize a strong positive meniscus. If the course of 
Section V - Page 6 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
entering parallel light is followed through the combination with convex surface 
against concave (Light may enter from either side) it will be seen that the power 
of the meniscus given by neutralization is measured from the convex surface; i. e. , 
the lens should be worn with convex surface toward the eye. 
It might seem at first sight that a bi-convex lens would neutralize a bi- 
concave lens of the same curvature. This is true for weak powers only. I f we draw 
a cross section of the lenses and extend the outside curves it is at once evident 
that the combination is a section of a larger lens of meniscus shape which is essen- 
tially positive (figure 8). This was clearly brought out in a pamphlet entitled 
"Why Strong Contra-Generic Lenses of Equal Power Fail to Neutralize Each Other", by 
Charles F. Prentice, 1899. 
For perfect neutralization of a strong bi-convex and bi-concave it is necessary 
that the curvature of the concave lens shall be a little steeper. This means a very 
thin air space at the center. In practice, however, neutralizing sets are manu- 
factured including 20D. This is accomplished by reducing the diameters. The lenses 
are designed to have equal effective powers and although they cannot be made to 
neutralize, theoretically speaking, they do so in practice, for the very small 
difference from complete neutralization is less than the eye can readily observe, 
amounting to a maximum of 0.04D. for a lens 40 mm. in diameter. 
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 
(1) From the above considerations of theory and practice and development of 
the spectacle industry, it is of importance to recognize the physical significance 
of the power of a lens and to know its several meanings and uses. 
(2) We have seen that the important characteristic of a lens is its effect 
upon the eye and that this depends not only upon the curves of the two surfaces, but 
also upon the thickness, the shape and position before the eye. 
(3) Neutralization must be practiced with discrimination if used at all. 
(4) Trial sets and newly designed spectacles are calculated for and marked 
with effective power. The meniscus lens is very largely used and will continue to 
be used, for it gives a wider field of vision and is capable of better marginal 
correction. With these developments we must have a clearer understanding of power 
and neutralization and of the relation between them. 
LENS MEASURES 
A word about devices for measuring lenses may not be amiss. First let us 
dispose of lens gauges by saying that too much must not be expected of them. The 
gauge itself may be extremely well made, but its use as a lens measure taxes the 
ability of the best instrument maker. It does not determine the power of a lens; it 
merely measures surface curvature. It is nothing more than an extremely accurate 
depth gauge. If we assure the distance between the outside points to be 20 mm., the 
plunger moves about 0.10 mm, per diopter. Therefore, a motion of only 0.001 nun. 
changes the reading 0.0 ID. The machined parts must be true to better than the 
fineness of a good timepiece to give an average accuracy of 0.03D. Only the very 
best workmanship will produce a gauge in which there is not a single error as great 
as 1/8 D. The real usefulness of a gauge consists in rapidly finding to what series 
a lens belongs and it can also be used with considerable accuracy in testing the 
uniformity of like surfaces. 
Section V - Page 7 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
LENS TESTING 
The best method of verifying lens power is by the use of a Lensometer or 
similar instrument. Speaking of the Lensometer only, with which we are the most 
familiar, here is an instrument which measures to the same order of accuracy to 
which the lenses are made. An experienced operator, using an instrument in correct 
adjustment, can read to 0.03 D. The optical principles underlying the construction 
of this instrument are such that it reads directly the effective power of a single 
lens or a succession of lenses as the case may be. 
Section V - Page 8 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
DIAGRAM - MSSS I-0-l04b 
FORMS OF LENSES 
DOUBLE CONVEX LENS 
FIGURE 1 
DOUBLE CONCAVE LENS 
FIGURE 4 
PLANO-CONVEX LENS 
FIGURE 2 
PLANO-CONCAVE LENS 
FIGURE 5 
CONVEX MENISCUS LENS 
FIGURE 3 
CONCAVE MENISCUS LENS 
FIGURE 6 
Section V - Page 9 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
DIAGRAM - MSSS I-0-104c 
DEVIATION OF LIGHT RAYS BY A LENS 
FOCUS (VIRTUAL) 
AXIAL RAY (UNDEVIATED) 
FOCAL LENGTH (VERTEX FOCAL LENGTH) 
FOCAL LENGTH (VERTEX FOCAL LENGTH) 
- CONVERGENT RAY 
DIVERGENT RAY 
FOCUS (ACTUAL) 
Section V - Page 10 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
Fi gure 8 
Fi gu r e 9 
Figure 10 
Figure 11 
DIAGRAM - MSSS I-0-104d 
Types of 1enses 
Section V - Page 11 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
FOCAL LENGTHS 
MSSS CHART A - 0-104 
Diopters 
Millimeters 
Inches 
Diopters 
Millimeters 
Inches 
0. 25 
4000 
157.48 
5. 50 
182 
7. 16 
0.50 
2000 
78.74 
5.75 
174 
6.85 
0.75 
1333 
52.49 
6.00 
167 
6.56 
1.00 
1000 
39.37 
6.50 
154 
6.06 
1.25 
800 
31.50 
7.00 
143 
5.62 
1.50 
666 
26.25 
7.50 
133 
5.25 
1.75 
572 
22.50 
8.00 
125 
4.92 
2.00 
500 
19.68 
8.50 
118 
4.63 
2.25 
444 
17.50 
9.00 
111 
4.37 
2.50 
400 
15.75 
9.50 
104 
4. 14 
2.75 
364 
14. 32 
10.00 
100 
3.94 
3.00 
333 
13. 12 
10.50 
95.4 
3.75 
3. 25 
308 
12. 11 
11.00 
90.9 
3. 58 
3.50 
286 
11.25 
11.50 
88. 1 
3. 42 
3.75 
267 
1 0.50 
12.00 
83.3 
3. 28 
4.00 
250 
9.84 
13.00 
76.9 
3.03 
4.25 
236 
9.26 
14.00 
71.4 
2.81 
4. 50 
222 
8.75 
15.00 
66.7 
2.62 
4.75 
211 
8.29 
16.00 
62.5 
2.46 
5.00 
200 
7.87 
17.00 
58.8 
2.32 
5.25 
191 
7.50 
20.00 
50.0 
1.97 
Section V - Page 12 FOCAL POWER OF OPHTHALMIC LENSES 
TABLE I 
Difference between 
Equivalent power 
Effective 
Neutralizing “ 
and (D,+ D2) 
Positives 
Equivalent 
Effective 
Neutralizing 
Di+D. 
Bi- 
Convex 
Con- 
vexo 
Plane 
Menis- 
cus 
D2= —3 
Menis- 
cus 
D2 = — 6 
Bi- 
Convex 
Con- 
vexo 
Plane 
Menis- 
cus 
D2 = — 3 
Menis- 
cus 
D2= —6 
Bi- 
Convex 
Con- 
vexo 
Plane 
Menis- 
cus 
D2 = — 3 
Menis- 
cus 
D2= -6 
Thick- 
ness 
0 
+2 
+4 
+ 6 
+ 8 
+ 10 
+ 12 
+ 14 
+ 16 
+ 18 
+ 20 
0.00 
0.00 
—0.01 
—0.02 
—0.04 
-0.08 
—0.12 
—0.19 
—0.28 
—0.39 
—0.49 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
+0.01 
+0.02 
+0.04 
+0.06 
+0.09 
+0.12 
+0.15 
+0.19 
+0.25 
+0.30 
+0.03 
+0.06 
+0.10 
+0.15 
+0.22 
+0.30 
+0.37 
+0.46 
+0.57 
0.00 
0.00 
+0.01 
+0.02 
+0.04 
+0.08 
+0.12 
+0.19 
+0.28 
+0.41 
+0.51 
0.00 
+0.01 
+0.03 
+0.08 
+0.17 
+0.32 
+0.52 
+0.79 
+ 1.18 
+ 1.68 
+ 2.17 
+0.01 
+0.03 
+0.08 
+0.17 
+0.32 
+0.55 
+0.80 
+ 1.18 
+ 1.70 
+ 2.36 
+ 2.91 
+0.03 
+0.08 
+0.17 
+0.32 
+0.53 
+0.84 
+ 1.16 
+ 1.65 
+ 2.30 
+ 3.12 
0.00 
0.00 
+0.01 
+0.02 
+0.04 
+0.08 
+0.12 
+0.19 
+0.28 
+0.41 
+0.51 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
0.00 
+0.01 
+0.01 
+0.01 
+0.02 
+0.02 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.03 
+0.05 
+0.06 
+0.08 
+0.09 
+0.11 
+0.12 
+0.13 
+0.15 
+0.17 
1.2 m 
1.9 
2.6 
3.1 
3.8 
4.6 
5.1 
5.7 
6.4 
7.2 
7.3 
Note—This table is based upon the first fou 
terms of Formulae 
2 and 3. Index, 1,500. 
Negatives 
Thick- 
ness 
E 
E 
OMONNNNMsN 
Menis- 
cus 
D,= -f-6 
OOOOOHrtNNN 
to 
c 
*N 
H 
u 
Menis- 
cus 
Di= + 3 
-KN^i^vOOOIN'l'Nr-iK 
000000^1^-1^^ 
3 
(D 
z 
Plano- 
Con- 
cave 
00'-lOllrl1'lNO\t<lNO 
OOOOOOOO"— 
dd doodddddo 
-Con- 
rave 
OOOMtHfH(N(NM^U1 
OOOOOOOOOOO 
ddddddddddd 
PQ 
++++++++ 
Menis- 
cus 
Dj= +6 
OOOOOOOOOOO 
d ° 
<L> 
> 
Menis- 
cus 
D,= +3 
5qq8§o8888B 
ddddddddddd 
+++ 
St 
w 
Plano- 
Con- 
cave 
§8888888888 
ddddddddddd 
-Con- 
rave 
OOOOrtrt(N(St^-tui 
qqqqqoooooo 
ddddddddddd 
« 
+++++++ 
Menis- 
cus 
Di= +6 
-rt< -rf uo in VONN 
qqqqqqqooo 
4-» 
c 
<u 
13 
> 
Menis- 
cus 
Dj=+3 
WrtHrHrHHrHNMM 
qqqqqqqooo 
3 
cr 
U] 
Plano- 
Con- 
cave 
88888888888 
ddddddddddd 
Bi-Con- 
cave 
OOO'IHrtHNl'lTlUfl 
qqqqqqoqooo 
ddddddddddd 
1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 
Q 
+ 
Or^,f'OOoO 
7TTT777777 
Q 
M 1 1 1 i 1 1 I 1 
MSSS CHART K - 0-104 
Section V - Page 13 SECTION VI 
FACIAL MEASUREMENTS FACIAL MEASUREMENTS 
All the necessary facial measurements for making a pair of glasses can be done 
with a millimeter rule. These measurements should be verified, where possible, with 
a frame from stock corresponding to the measurements taken. 
The first measurement is the interpupi 1 lary distance. This is the distance, 
expressed in millimeters, between the center of the pupils, commonly abbreviated as 
P. D. There are several methods of taking this reading but the most satisfactory is 
as follows: Seat the patient, facing you, about 16 to 18 inches from you. Hold the 
P. D. rule in the right hand between the thumb and the forefinger. Lay the rule 
across the bridge of the patient’s nose so that it will extend to cover both pupils. 
Steady your hand by placing the 4th and 5th fingers against the side of the patient’s 
face. Instruct the patient to look at the pupil of your left eye. Close your 
eye and sight the initial mark of the rule on the outside of the patient’s right 
pupil with your left eye. Now instruct the patient to look at the pupil of your 
right eye. Hold the rule steady on the face and open your right eye and sight the 
inside of the patient’s left pupil over the rule noting the millimeter reading 
indicated on the rule. To get an accurate reading it is imperative that the rule be 
held steady during the entire operation. You can check on the reading by having the 
patient repeat the whole process while you recheck your readings. The advantage of 
this method lies in the fact that the patient is looking straight forward or at 
infinity as far as convergence is concerned while the measurement is being taken. 
This is seen by the fact that each eye when measured is looking straight forward. 
The near P. D. may be taken in a number of ways, anyof which are good as long 
as the patient is converging to his normal reading point. You may have the patient 
look at the center of your forehead or any other convenient point at that distance. 
Distance between lenses commonly referred to as D.B.L., is the next measurement. 
This is most easily accomplished by measuring across the nose to the points where 
the pads would normally rest and adding 4 mm. to this measurement. If, however, 
your D.B.L. is in even numbers on the frame and the measurement comes out to be odd, 
add not more than one millimeter to the whole. It is better not to reduce the 
measurement because this may result in the eye-wires touching the side of the 
nose. If, however, you have a patient with a thin high nose this is permissible. 
The next measurement is to take the width of temples one inch back of the 
temple joint. This is done with the inch rule that is incorporated on the P.D. 
rule. Hold the ruler across the patient’s face and measure one inch back of the 
joint, or about the lateral edge of the eye socket, in much the same manner as you 
measured the P. D. Add one quarter inch to the reading. 
Length of temple to back of the ear is next. Place the index finger back of 
the ear in such a manner that the tip of the finger will rest at the point where the 
temple first touches the ear. Place the ruler against the tip of the finger and 
sight over the ruler at the front of the cornea, add 1/2 inch to this measurement 
for the length to top of ear. To this add 2 inches for the total length of the 
riding-bow temple. 
The angle of joint of the temple cannot be taken with a ruler. In the ful-vue 
frame, the standard is 10 degrees pantoscopic for standard wear, and 13 degrees for 
reading only. This may be adjusted when the glasses are dispensed. 
In the Army program only the drop pattern having a 3 mm. difference will be 
used. The ideal method is to take the D.B.L, from the P. D. for the eyesize. 
Example: P. D. 64, D.B.L. 22, 64-22 equals 42 eyesize. It may be necessary to 
Section VI - Page 1 FACIAL MEASUREMENTS 
have a larger or smaller eyesize because of the patient’s facial characteristics. 
A man having a broad face with bulging temples would take a larger eyesize and a man 
having a thin narrow face would take a smaller eyesize. This is dictated by 
cosmetic appearance and comfort rather than necessity. 
After all possible measurements have been taken or estimated, a ffame should be 
taken from stock corresponding as nearly to the measurements found as possible, and 
tried on the patient to verify the measurements and estimations that you have made 
and the necessary corrections noted. 
The importance of an accurate interpup i 1 lary distance (P.D. ) cannot be over- 
emphasized. In any j rib it is necessary to have an accurate plan or blueprint to 
follow, to have the finished product accurate. The ref ractionis t takes great pains 
in his examination to give the optician the exact formula for the resultant power of 
the lenses to be used. It is the optician’s job to fashion the spectacles in such a 
manner that the accuracy of this formula is not destroyed in the making of the 
spectacles. The facial measurements are the blueprints made by the optician. The 
primary basis of this blueprint is the interpup i 11 ary distance (P. D. ) measurement. 
If the interpupillary distance (P.D.) is not accurate, a prism will be incorporated 
in the finished lens that is not called for in the Rx. This will cause discomfort 
to the patient and discredit to the optician. 
M.S. S. S. DIAGRAM F-0-0 10 5 
Optical Center-d 
Geometrical Center-x 
Decentration In 
Showing decentration of 3 mm. in each lens. 
Total decentration 6 mm. 
Geometrical Center-x 
Optical Center-o 
Decent rat ion Ou t 
Showing decentration of 3 mm. out, each lens. 
Total decentration 6 mm. 
Section VI - Page 2 FACIAL MEASUREMENTS 
In many cases it will be found necessary to decenter the lenses in some 
manner. This is done so that the patient will look through the optical centers of 
the lenses. 
Each lens has two centers, an optical center and a geometrical center. They 
may or may not be at the same place in the finished lens. Decentration is the 
moving of the optical center from the geometrical center. 
An example of decentration to obtain the proper interpupil 1 ary distance (P.D. ) 
is as follows: The patient has an interpupil lary distance (P. D.) of 64 mm. Due to 
facial characteristics and size of head, it is necessary to use the fol lowing f rame: 
Distance between lenses (D. B.L. ) 24 mm.; eyesize 46 mm.; the frame interpupil lary 
distance (P.D.) is 70 mm. To have the patient look through the optical centers of 
the lenses it will be necessary to decenter each lens in 3 mm. , or a total of 6 
mm. Should this patient be wearing a plus 5.00 over each eye, and the decentration 
not done, the resultant prism would be 3 prism diopters that the Rx did not call 
for. Examples of decentration are shown on preceding pa ge. 
Section VI - Page 3 SECTION VII 
INTERPRETATION OF PRESCRIPTION INTERPRETATION OF PRESCRIPTION 
The prescription should come to the optical repair unit completely filled out 
on the proper form and properly signed. However, due to the congestion in some 
installations and the carelessness or inexperience of the recorders involved, many 
prescriptions will contain only a minimum of information. It will be the concern of 
the unit operators to properly interpret the prescription and perform the necessary 
mechanical work involved. 
Prescription forms may vary greatly and in some instances be written on plain 
piece of paper but all should contain the following information in some form. 
(Fbll Name of Individual) Serial No. Rank Co., Regt. or Corps 
P.D. D.B.L. 
Far Near Temple Length Eye Size 
SPH. CYL. AXIS PRISM BASE DEC. 
Distance R 
L 
Add R 
L 
Repair: 
Cas e: 
Special Instructions: 
S t a t ion 
Date 
(Signature) 
(Rank and Organization) 
Each prescription will be checked by the unit clerk and a number assigned to 
it. He will see that the necessary information is present, transfer the prescription 
to the work order, exercising care that the plus and minus signs have not been 
inverted and that the decimal points are between the proper digits. 
Section VII - Page 1 INTERPRETATION OF PRESCRIPTION 
Should the original prescription be written as minus cylinders the clerk will 
make an accurate transposition at the time he transfers the original to the work 
order. Inasmuch as minus cylinders are not stocked or ground, the practice of 
always transposing prescriptions to read as plus cylinders will tend to eliminate 
the common error of processing lenses ninety degrees off axis. 
Transposition must be thoroughly understood by each member of the unit per- 
sonnel as it is the greatest single factor in the interpretation of the prescription. 
By definition: To transpose a lens is to change its curves or designation 
without changing its refractive value. 
The basic rule of transposition provides that vhen two cylinders of equal power 
and of similar sign are crossed at right angles, they produce the effect of a 
spherical lens of the same power as one of the cylinders. 
PLANE CYLINDER TO A SPHERO-CYLINDER - The sphere will be the same sign and 
power as the cylinder. The cylinder will remain the same power but opposite in sign 
and axis. 
Example: +1.00c axis 90 — + 1.00s C - 1.00c axis 180 
SPHERO-CYLINDER 
+ C to C- or - O - to - O *♦* 
Add the cylinder to the sphere and reverse the sign and axis of the cylinder. 
Example: + 1.00s O"t“l-00c axis 90 — *f*2.00sO- 1.00c axis 180 
Example: — 1.00s C. - 1.00c axis 90 I - 2.00s O-f- 1.00c axis 180 
SPHERO-CYLINDER 
-b CD - or - O -f* 
When the cylinder is stronger, subtract the sphere from the cylinder and re- 
verse the signs of both the sphere and the cylinder and the axis of the cylinder. 
Example: *f- 1.00s C - 2.00c axis 90 - - 1.00s O*f"2.00c axis 180 
When the sphere is the stronger, subtract the cylinder from the sphere to 
obtain the sphere and reverse the sign and axis of the cylinder. 
All these rules may be condensed as follows: 
Subtract the smaller from the larger for the sphere, keeping the sign of the 
larger. Change the sign of the cylinder and reverse the axis. 
The placing of decimal points cannot be overemphasized. Make sure they are 
never omitted and that they are properly inserted. Always place a zero before the 
decimal point when indicating powers of less than one diopter. 
Example: Right -bO.50 
Wrong -f- .50 
Section VII - Page 2 INTERPRETATION OF PRESCRIPTION 
Always carry fractions of a diopter to two places. 
Example: 
Right +1.50 
Wrong +1.5 
If a prescription is obviously incorrect, it is advisable to contact it’s 
source of origin if possible and ask for verification. 
For example 
Right: + 7.5 +0.75 x 90 
Left: + 0.75 +0.75 x 90 
The spherical power of the right lens is incorrectly written for either a lens 
of seven and one half diopters or three fourths of a diopter. Either interpretation 
could easily prove incorrect. If verification from the source of the prescription 
or from spectacles being worn by the patient is unavailable, the problem will be 
referred to the Unit Commander for decision who will make a notation on the pre- 
scription as to which lens was supplied. 
Although the following prescription may be correct, it has the appearance of 
being improperly written. 
R. +2.00 + 2.00 x 45 
L. -t- 2.00 - 2.00 x 135 
It is probable that the sign of the cylindrical power of the left lens was 
intended to read plus instead of minus. Upon transposing the left lens to a plus 
cylinder it can be readily seen that the prescription would have two reasonably 
strong cylinders at the same oblique axis. Although this condition does happen, it 
is against the general rule and should be verified. 
The logical assumption is that the sign of the left cylinder has not been 
completed. This is such a common error that many civilian opticians use the fol- 
lowing procedure when making plus or minus signs. 
Always make the vertical stroke of the plus sign first and then the horizontal 
stroke. If you are then interrupted during the procedure you will have a vertical 
stroke and the error is apparent at once. Whereas, if you had made the horizontal 
stroke first and then neglected to complete the sign, the prescription would be 
processed for a minus instead of a plus lens and would be of no value to the wearer. 
The minimum information that can be contained in the prescription and still 
permit proper processing is as follows: Sphere power, cylinder power and axis (if 
cylinder is present) and the Interpupillary distance (P.D.) or it's equivalent. If 
the eyesize and the distance between lenses (D.B.L.) are given, assume they re- 
present an accurate P.D., and that no decentration was intended. 
If any other information is omitted it may be filled in from previous ex- 
perience and the known averages: Average D.B.L., 22 mm. Average temple length 6Vin. 
The eyesize will be consistent with the D.B.L. and P.D. 
The lense patterns consist of two shapes* Round for gas mask inserts and a 
P3 drop shape for government issued spectacles. 
Section VII - Page 3 INTERPRETATION OF PRESCRIPTION 
Always exercise extreme care in interpretation, transferring and the trans- 
position of prescriptions* The greatest margin of probable error lies within these 
three procedures* 
Work properly processed the first time will increase the production capacity, 
reduce the percentage of stock loss and thereby reduce the amount of stock and 
supplies that it will be necessary to requisition. 
The foregoing must be observed and put into daily practice in order that each 
unit or installation may blend itself into the Army program of constant improvement. 
Section VII - Page 4 SECTION VIII 
ADJUSTING AND FITTING ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
ADJUSTING - G1 asses are adjusted to make them as comfortable as possible 
while maintaining the correct alignment for efficient vision. A pair of glasses 
may be in perfect visual alignment and still appear crooked on the patient’s face 
due to irregularities of the features. This may be corrected by the proper ad- 
justment of the glasses. 
Adjusting becomes tiresome to the patient if the glasses are put on and taken 
off for each slight bend. To make the process more efficient and less tiring to 
the patient, make as many adjustments as possible at each trial. 
When adjusting a pad bridge spectacle, the first step is to shape the guards 
to lie evenly and loosely against the sides of the nose. To make this adjustment 
it is not necessary to place the glasses on the patient with the temples over 
the ears. Hold the glasses by the rims with the temples spread as far as possible, 
place the bridge to the nose and note the pad adjustments necessary. At the same 
time note whether the temples should be spread, narrowed, or curved to conform 
with the sides of the head. Shape the guards to conform with the nose, being sure 
that they do not squeeze the nose. Shape the temples to conform with the head. 
If the temples bind or touch the sides of the head, file the check lug on the butt 
of the temple until you have the proper spread. Round the temple shaft with the 
thumb and first two fingers of the hand until the temple shafts do not press against 
the sides of the head. 
Next, place the glasses on the patient with the temples over the ears. Turn 
the patient’s head until you have a side view. Notice the position of the guards, 
the pantoscopic or retroscopic tilt, and the point where the temple fits the top 
of the ear. Remove the glasses and make the necessary adjustments and also shape 
the temple to the back of the ear. 
On the back of the ear there is a flat 
space running from the top where temple first 
touches (A. Fig. 1 ) to the high spot half 
way down the back of the ear. (B. Fig. 1). 
This flat part is usually at about a 70 
degree angle. The temple should be shaped 
to lie flat between these two points. The 
high spot on the back of the ear is very 
sensitive and will become sore with very 
little pressure. Make a sharp bend in the 
temple here to distribute the temple pressure 
equally between the flat of the ear and the 
curve below the high spot. The temple should 
be curved outward from the lobe depression 
of the ear, because this is another sensitive 
portion of the ear. Although a riding bow 
temple of the correct length will extend to 
the center of the lobe of the ear, the tip 
of the temple should be shaped so that it 
will not press or dig into this portion. 
To shape a temple to conform with the ear, grasp the shaft of the temple with 
the left hand to steady it. Place the forefinger of the right hand under the 
temple at the point where the temple first touches the ear. Place the third finger 
about 1/8 inch down from the forefinger on the underneath side, and the thumb 
between the fingers on the top side. By exerting pressure with the thumb and 
Fig. 1 
Section VIII - Page 1 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
holding the shaft steady with the left hand the bend necessary at the top of the 
temple and the flat portion can be formed at the same time. Using the same method 
make the bend at the high spot of the ear but do not flatten the temple below the 
second bend. Then using the concave convex plier bend the tip of the temple out- 
ward. These bends should make the temple lie evenly along the back of the ear. If 
the bends do not lie in the proper place rebend until the proper distribution is 
obtained. After one temple is shaped correctly the other temple can be shaped, 
using the first as an example. After the temples have been shaped it will be 
necessary to replace the glasses and note the guard adjustment, pa nt osc opic or 
retroscopic angle, and the parallelism of the lenses to the face and make the 
necessary readjustments. 
If the lenses are too close to the cheeks, and too far from the eyebrows, the 
temples should be bent retroscopic, or upward. If the lenses are too close to the 
eyebrows and too far from the cheeks the temples should be bent pantoscopic, or 
downward. The phrase "bend the temples" is not correct, the actual bending is done 
with the endpiece. To accomplish this, grasp the endpiece, with a curved shank 
angling plier, as close to the eyewire as possible. Holding the angling plier in 
the left hand with the plier turned in such a manner as to have the hand as far 
under the glasses as possible. Grasp the protruding endpiece with a parallel jaw 
or snipe nose plier and twist the endpiece until the open temple is at the desired 
angle. After shaping one temple to the desired angle the other endpiece can be 
twisted in the same manner until the temples are equal. 
The next step in adjusting is to note if the glasses are straight on the face, 
if one lens is higher or lower than the other. In this alignment the eyebrows are 
a poor line to follow because of their width, and the fact that they often vary in 
height on the same person. The easiest and surest line to follow is the line of the 
roots of the lower cilia. Mark the lenses about 2 mm. below the geometrical center 
(using a grease pencil or ink) and sight these marks with the lower cilia. In 
adjusting bifocals mark the top of each segment and sight these on the roots of the 
lower cilia. 
In adjusting to make lenses straight on the face raise or bend the temple 
toward pantoscopic on the low side, or bend the temple retroscopic on the high side. 
The bending of one or both temples in a retroscopic or pantoscopic direction does 
not raise or lower the glasses as a whole on the face. The nose acts as a fulcrum 
and as one side is lowered the other is raised. Where both temples are bent the 
effect is to increase the pantoscopic or retroscopic angle as the case may be. 
The next step is to note the height of the glasses on the face. If the glasses 
are too low on the face first see if the temple tension is correct. If the temple 
tension is correct and the glasses are still not of the correct height then the only 
way they can be adjusted is to lower or raise the guards as the case may demand. 
Next note the position of the lenses in relation to their distance from the 
eye and particularly the lashes. The lenses should set 13.5 mm. from the cornea, 
this is the anterior nodal point of the eye and the ideal distance. They should 
never touch the lashes. If the lenses are too far from the eyes, the easiest adjust- 
ment is to widen the spread of the pads. This may cause the curl of the guard arm 
to come too close to the eye, if this is the case the guard arm must be shortened. 
If the lenses touch the lashes, narrow the pad spread, without pinching the nose; 
otherwise the guard arms must be lengthened. 
Section VIII - Page 2 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
Notice the distance of each lens individually from the eye. If one lens is 
closer than the other it means that the temple tension is unequal. For this adjust- 
ment shorten the top or back-of-ear tension on the lens side that is too far from 
the eye, or loosen the back-of-ear tension on the side that is too close to the eye. 
Which adjustment to make will depend on the overall tension produced by the adjust- 
ment. To be sure of equal temple tension, place the glasses on the patient; holding 
each endpiece by the tip of the first finger, pull the glasses slightly from the 
nose and see if they fall back on the nose evenly. 
The last step is to note if the glasses fit perfectly, and that each lens is 
equal distance from the nose, if the nose is normal, and adjust accordingly. 
PROCEDURE - Step number one is to see that the lenses are straight in a rim, 
or that they are firmly mounted in a rimless, and that the glasses are true in 
alignment. 
Step number two for a pad bridge frame or mounting spectacle, have the pads lie 
evenly or flat on the sides of the nose and the temples spread so as not to bind on 
the sides of the head. 
Step number three is to shape the temples to conform to the back of the ear, 
and bend the endpieces to the desired pantoscopic or retroscopic tilt. 
Step number four is to note the height or parallel position of each lens on 
the face, raising or lowering by retroscopic or pantoscopic tilt of the endpiece. 
Step number five is the height of the glasses on the face. 
Step number six is the distance of the glasses from the cornea. 
Step number seven is the distance of each lens from the nose, and a general 
check up of all previous adjustments. 
Section VIII - Page 3 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M. S. S. S. Diagram 6-0-10 7 
Temple as it comes from stock. 
Temple after it has been properly 
formed to fit patient. 
Endpiece closed and parallel. 
Endpiece not closed. Usually 
caused by lens being too large. 
Section VIII - Page 4 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M.S.S.S. Diagram 7-0-107 
Retroscopic Tilt 
The temple is tilted upward 
or toward the top of the lens. 
Pantoscopic Tilt 
The temple is tilter downward 
or toward the bottom of the lens. 
Section VIII - Page 5 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M.S.S.S. Diagram 5-0-107 
Eyes on line, 4 points 
touching. 
EYEWIRE 
i I 
BRIDGE 
GUARD ARM 
ENDPIECE 
PADS 
D.B.L. 
[Distance Between Lenses) 
(P.D,-Interpupi1 lary Distance) 
Most easily measured by placing the rule against the inside edge 
of one eyewire and measuring to the outside of the other eyewire 
FRAME P.D. 
Section VIII - Page 6 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M.S.S.S. Diagram 
Glasses showing eyes looking through optical center and aligned properly 
Glasses crooked on face. Showing one eye above the optical center and 
the other belcw. This is usually caused by one temple being higher than 
the other. 
Glasses straight on the face but the eyes are looking through the lenses 
outside the optical centers causing prism base in plus lenses and base 
out in minus. Frame too small for the P.D. of the patient. 
Section VIII - Page 7 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M.S.S.S. Diagram 9-0-107 
Glasses straight on the face but eyes looking through the lenses inside 
the optical centers causing prism base out in plus lenses and prism base 
in minus lenses. Frame too large for the patient. 
Eyes above optical centers. This may be caused by too wide a D.B.L. or 
temple tension not strong enough or pads being too wide. 
Eyes below optical centers, usually caused by D.B.L. being too small and 
pads riding high on the nose. 
One eye inside the optical center and the other outside. Usually caused 
by unusual facial characteristics, remedied by pad adjustment. 
Section VIII - Page 8 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR FITTING 
EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, M-l 
Every pair of M-l Gas Mask Eyeglasses must be prescribed and fitted carefully. 
Improper fit may make the mask itself unwearable and every effort should be made to 
insure the best possible vision and permanently comfortable adjustment. 
The instructions and suggestions shown below are intended to facilitate your 
handling of a completely new visual device and it is recommended that the Manual be 
retained for ready reference at all times. Follow the procedure exactly and check 
every pair of eyeglasses for performance in the mask and on the wearer's face. 
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF GAS MASK EYEGLASSES - Refer to Fig, I and famil- 
iarize yourself with the various parts and their designations so that it will be 
easy to follow the instructions. Note that certain portions of the frame have been 
designated as "sections" for simplicity in referring to them. 
Note also that seven types of eyeglasses are available, designated as "Posi- 
tions." Positions A, B, C, D and E all have 40mm lenses with their centers located 
in the relative locations indicated by the crosses on the plastic gauge in the 
fitting case. Positions W and X (34mm eyes) have their centers in the same location 
as Positions B and D. 
Refer to Figs. II and Il-a showing a top view of a mask with eyeglasses in 
place which demonstrates how the smaller lenses provide additional clearance for 
protruding lashes, brows, and noses. 
TO INSERT EYEGLASSES - 1. Snap the headstraps of the mask over the front of 
the facepiece and fold back the edges of the mask so that you can get at the inside 
of the eyepieces easily. 
2. Grasp the eyeglass frame (Fig. I) at its widest point, between the thumb 
and first two fingers, and compress it slightly. 
3. Press the lower section into the lower inside margin of the eyepiece, 
making sure that it fits snugly. 
4. Shift your grip from the nasal section to the eyewire and press the nasal 
section into position against the gas mask lens and the margin of the eyepiece. 
5. Still retaining your grasp on the temporal section and the eyewire, compress 
the frame and guide the temporal section into position against the gas mask lens 
and the margin of the eyepiece. 
6. Run your thumb around the frame and, if necessary, press it securely into 
the groove between the lens and the rubber flange of the eyepiece, so that the lugs 
grip securely. 
TO REMOVE EYEGLASSES - 1. Grasp the eyewire (See Fig. I) between the thumb and 
first two fingers and move it toward the center of the eyepiece. 
2. Continue this motion while gently lifting the eyewire, causing the eye- 
glass to spring out in this sequence: First, the nasal section; second, the lower 
section; and, finally, the temporal section. 
NOTES ON INSERTION AND REMOVAL OF EYEGLASSES - 1. During these operations, 
have the wearer hold his mask for you in the most convenient position. Some fitters 
prefer to work from the upper end of the mask; others, from the lower (mouthpiece) 
end. 
Section VIII - Page 9 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
PIG. I 
EYEGLASS 
(RIGHT EYE) 
FRONT VIEW 
Gap permitting compression of frame during Insertion 
Lug 
Nasal Section 
Plastic Test Lens 
Temporal 
Section 
Eye wire holding 
Correcting Lens: 
ABCD and E - 4Omm Rd. 
W and X - 54mm Rd. 
Frame 
Lower Section 
FIG. II - TOP VIEW OF GAS MASK 
WITH EYEGLASSES IN PLACE 
Angle of eyepiece restricts 
the distance In front of the 
cornea at which a lens of 
40mm Rd. can be placed 
Plastic gas 
mask eyepiece 
Correcting Lenses held In 
proper plane before eyes 
Frame of eyeglass directly 
behind eyepiece 
PIG. Il-a - THUS: 54mm RD. IN INSERTS W AND X TO 
ADVANCE THE LENSES WHEN NECESSARY 
Section VIII - Page 10 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
FIG. Ill - USING PLASTIC GAGE TO DETERMINE EYEGLASS POSITION REQUIRED 
In this case, gage indicates that eyeglass A is required 
FIG. IV - CHECKING INSERTS FOR PERMANENT USE BY OBSERVING 
ALIGNMENT OF l80° LINES BEFORE EYES 
Ink dot on outer surface of plastic 
eyepiece shows extent and direction 
to turn lens in lining up the 180° 
line 
180° line of right lens tips down at 
temporal extremity. If a cylinder it 
will be off axis. Left lens is O.K. 
Both lenses should be lined up in this 
manner 
FIG. V - FINAL STEPS 
File mark on eye wire 
to show where diamond 
dot should be when 
lens is at correct 
axis with mask on face 
Bend projecting end 
of screw to prevent 
Its backing out 
Section VIII - Page 11 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
2. The frame of the mask is purposely formed slightly larger than the largest 
eyepiece so that it will fit securely into the groove. Do not hestitate to compress 
it sufficiently to facilitate insertion. 
3. In removing eyeglasses, your hand will move in a circular path, clockwise 
for the right side and counter-clockwise for the left. 
FITTING AND TAKING MEASUREMENTS - 1. Have the wearer put on his mask and 
adjust it properly, which means primarily seeing to it that the eyepieces are well 
centered, both horizontally and vertically. This is particularly important because 
many men wear their masks off-center and, frequently, with one eyepiece higher than 
the other. 
2. Have the wearer direct his vision at a theoretical point on the ground 
about 75 feet away. 
3. Place the plastic measuring gauge in the nasal corner of the eyepiece 
(See Fig. Ill) so that the letters and crosses on the gauge cover the wearer’s eye. 
Hold the gauge with thumb and fingers in position shown in Fig. Ill so that it is 
perpendicular to the line of sight, not angled back like the gas mask lens--the 
gauge should be in contact with the lens only at the one corner. 
4. Look at the wearer’s pupil through the gauge and determine which cross 
(designated by a letter) is nearest the center of the pupil, that is, closest to 
the line of sight. 
5. Have the wearer remove the mask and fit into it the pair of Eyeglass Test 
Mounts (A, B, C, D or E) which the test with the gauge indicated will provide the 
best centering. 
6. Have the wearer put his mask back on and direct his vision at the same 
theoretical point 75 feet distant. 
7. Observe, first, how well the centers of the lenses (small squares) cor- 
respond with the centers of the pupils. Here, again, it may be necessary to adjust 
the mask itself to bring the two lenses into the same relative position with 
respect to the eyes. 
a- If positions A or B were tried first and the centers are too close 
together, the use of Positions D or E is indicated. Conversely, if 
Positions D or E are tried first and the centers are too far apart. 
Positions A or B should be used. 
b. If Positions B or E are tried first and bring the centers too high, 
Position C (which provides a pupillary separation about midway 
between the two) should be tried. 
8. Determine next whether the lenses of the eyeglass selected (A, B, C, D or E) 
will cause uncomfortable pressure against the wearer’s face. If so, substitution of 
one of the small-eye positions (W or X) is indicated. 
9. After selection of the proper Position, determine the amount of decentra- 
tion necessary, if any, by counting the number of small graduations (1mm each) from 
the center of the lens to the center of the pupil. Decentration can be held to a 
minimum by (a) adjustment of the mask and (b) proper selection of eyeglasses. 
Section VIII - Page 12 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
NOTES AND SUGGESTIONS ON FITTING - 1. Remember that most men rarely put on 
their masks in exactly the same position twice. Try to find the most suitable 
position in which the eyepieces are we 11-centered and a gas-tight fit is provided. 
After prescription lenses have been fitted to the eyeglasses, the man will un- 
consciously return to that position to get the best vision. 
2. The plastic measuring gauge will be found particularly helpful in determin- 
ing the most suitable vertical centering and should be used consistently to expedite 
fitting. Remember, however, that it should not lay back against the eyepiece lens 
but should touch only the corner. 
3. Hold decentration to the minimum. The crosses on the plastic gauge indicate 
the variety of Positions available and one of them should be fairly well centered 
on any wearer. 
4. If two different Positions seem to be required, such as an A and a D, the 
adjustment of the mask itself is incorrect. 
5. Use the smaller eye sizes (W and X) only when absolutely necessary. The 
field of vision through that type is rather restricted and it should be ordered only 
when the 40mm eyes cannot be fitted. 
TO ORDER EYEGLASSES - 1. Show the lens focus, 
2. Show the decentration in millimeters. It will not suffice to show the 
pupillary distance, because the distance between the lenses is not constant. 
3. Indicate the Position (A, B, C, D, E, W or X) which is required. 
TO FIT AND CHECK COMPLETED EYEGLASSES - 1. Insert the eyeglasses into the 
mask, being careful to avoid erasing the inked (180°) lines on the lenses. 
2. Direct the wearer to put on his mask and look at the theoretical point 
75 feet distant. 
3. Determine whether the inked lines on the lenses are in horizontal alignment 
before the wearer’s eyes. 
4. If not, check the adjustment of the mask. 
5. If either or both of the inked lines are not now horizontal, put an ink or 
wax crayon mark on the outer surface of the gas mask eyepiece at the point where the 
temporal extremity of the inked line should be located. (Fig. TV). 
6. Remove the mask and eyeglasses (one at a time). 
7. Back off the screw in the eyeglass and turn the lens in the amount which 
seems to be indicated. 
8. Tighten the screw again and then back it off one-ha If turn to relieve 
extreme pressure. 
9. Replace the eyeglass in the mask and check the temporal extremity of the 
inked line with the mark previously placed on the eyepiece. If not in alignment, 
remove the mask and eyeglass and repeat operations 6, 7, and 8, 
Section VIII - Page 13 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
10. Check the 180° lines with the mask on the wearer’s face. 
11. When both inked lines are horizontal and the mask is gas-tight, remove the 
mask and the eyeglasses from the mask. 
12. Insert the blade of your screw driver between the projecting end of the 
screw and the eyewire and bend the screw up at about 45° angle (Fig. V). This will 
prevent the screw from backing out and leaving the lens loose. 
13. With a sharp-edged file or other suitable tool, cut a mark in the eyewire 
at the temporal end of the inked line on the lens. This will serve as a reference 
point so that, if the lens should be turned in the eyewire, it can be properly 
re-set. The diamond mark which has been ground on the lens can be lined up with the 
file cut on the eyewire. 
14. Clean the lenses and then very carefully show the wearer how to insert and 
remove the eyeglasses. Point out that they must be removed periodically for 
cleaning and the simple technique must be acquired to eliminate the possibility of 
bending the eyeglasses and permanently destroying the alignment of the lenses before 
the eyes. Point out that the eyeglasses can be removed easily without the aid of 
any implement which might damage the mask. 
APPENDIX PERTAINING TO DISTRIBUTION 
OF EYEGLASS GAS MASK M-l IN OVERSEAS 
THEATRES OF OPERATION 
1. The distribution of the eyeglass gas mask M-l in overseas theatres will 
probably be accomplished through the same sources, through which ordinary spectacles 
for visual correction are provided; namely, eye clinics of hospital installations, 
Optical Repair and Replacement Sections of Medical Depot Companies and through the 
newly devised Optical Repair Units, Portable, as soon as the latter becomes available 
in the field. 
2. It is contemplated that in supplying these gas mask eyeglasses to the 
various theatres, the frames will be accompanied by a stock of lenses pre-edged to 
40mm eye size, round. These lenses will be in the foci range determined from an 
analysis of military prescriptions heretofore filled and should take care of the 
great majority of personnel requiring this correction. Pre-edged lenses are not 
being furnished, however, for the frames for positions W and X which have the 
smaller 34mm eye because of the impracticability of having to determine the quantity 
of these which will be required. It is anticipated, however, that these will 
represent a very small percentage of the total, and these, as well as odd foci 
prescriptions now provided for in the stock of edged lenses, will have to be taken 
care of in the same manner as other prescriptions for spectacles, that is, through 
optical repair and replacement facilities which have been established in the several 
theatres. 
3. The following information and instructions are for the guidance of those 
who may be furnishing this correction in the field away from regularly established 
optical repair installations: 
All the edged cylindrical lenses included in the stock supplied are ground 
and marked as "plus cylinders." Therefore, if the prescription calls for a 
"minus cylinder," that is, with a minus sign before the cylinder power, it 
must be transposed to plus cylinder form before the lens can be selected from 
stock and "laid out" for insertion in the eyeglass. 
Section VIII - Page 14 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
The simplest rule for transposition is this: Combine algebraically the sphere 
and cylinder powers to obtain the new sphere power; change the sign, but not 
the power, of the cylinder; and add 90° to the axis if it is 90° or less, or 
substract 90° if the axis is more than 90°. 
Example #1. -0.50 -0.50 x 90 
Transposed -1.00 40.50 x 180 
Note: When combining two minus powers, add the powers and retain the sign. 
Example #2. *1.00 -0.50 x 45 
Transposed 40.50 +0.50 x 135 
Note: When combining a minus power with a plus power, substract the smaller 
from the larger and retain the sign of the larger. 
Similarly, 4-1.00 -1.50 x 45 = -0.50 41.50 x 135 
Example #3. -0.50 x 145 
Transposed -0.50 4*0.50 x 55 
Note: In this case, the minus cylinder is combined with zero spherical power, 
which might be called a "plus power", and the rule in example #2 
applies. 
Example #4. ‘#“0,50 -0.50 x 15 
Transposed + 0.50 x 105 
Note: In this case, the minus and plus powers cancel out, leaving no spherical 
power. 
After transposing the prescription (if necessary), select from stock the plus 
cylinder lens required and note that it bears three ink dots which indicate the 
position of the cylinder axis. Then, with the bead in position to look directly 
down on the protractor: 
1. Place the lens, convex surface down, on the protractor with the center ink 
dot at the intersection of the two black lines at the center of the protractor. 
2. Keeping the center dot in that position, rotate the lens until the two 
outer ink dots are directly above the required axis line which is designated by the 
black figures. 
3. Holding the lens securely in that position, draw the 180° line with ink or 
wax pencil across the lens directly over the horizontal line of the protractor. 
Note: If the axis is 180°, the line will be superimposed on the three ink 
dots; if 90°, at right angles to the dots. 
4. Remove the lens and cut a mark with a sharp-cornered file or other suitable 
tool on the edge of the lens at one end of the 180° line. This will serve as a 
reference point after the line has been erased. 
5. Without erasing the 180 line, insert the lens into the eyeglass and turn up 
the screw only enough to hold the lens without preventing its being rotated. 
Section VIII - Page 15 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
6. Rotate the lens in the eye wire so that the end of the 180° line which has 
not been cut (Par. 4) is located at the middle bracket connecting the eye wire to 
the frame. (The middle bracket is the only one which is soldered to the frame, the 
other two being looped around it). 
7. Tighten the screw and then back it off one-half turn to relieve excessive 
pressure. 
8. Proceed with fitting as indicated in the Instruction Manual. 
METHOD OF OBTAINING THE DISTANCE 
FROM THE APEX OF THE CORNEA 
TO THE VERTEX OF THE LENS 
(VERTEX DISTANCE) 
The distance from the apex of the cornea to the vertex of the lens is most 
easily found by means of the Wessely Keratometer or a similiar instrument. This 
instrument will not be available in the field but by using the P.D. rule, a depth of 
curve chart, and being very careful, an accurate measurement may be obtained. 
Knowing the distance from the apex of the cornea to the vertex of the lens, you 
can accurately determine the resultant power of any lens placed at any distance in 
front of the eye by means of the chart showing the resultant powers of a lens as 
the distance of the lens is varied. This will prove valuable when the necessity for 
substitution arises. The lens 
power desired and the distance of 
the lens from the eye may be 
determined from Chart 1-0-107. 
This distance is known as the 
Vertex Distance. 
Seat the patient so that you 
are facing the right side of his 
head. With the P.D. rule in the 
right hand place it along his 
temple in such a manner that the 
index mark of the rule is toward 
the ear, the 6 cm. mark about even 
with the apex of the cornea and the 
rule resting against the patient’s 
temple and the temporal edge of 
the eyewire of his glasses. (See 
Fig. 1). Place your eye 16 inches 
from the rule and line up the 
nasal edge of the eyewire and the 
temporal edge of the eyewire as 
you would the sights of a rifle. 
(See Fig. 2). 
Fig. 1 
Rule 
Fig. 2 
Section VIII - Page 16 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
Measure the apparent distance from the apex of the cornea to the eyewire of the 
glasses by sighting the corneal apex and eyewire positions on the rule. This 
measurement is not the true distance. (See Fig. 2). The base of the triangle 
A R’ S’, the distance S’ R’, which is actually measured is not as large as the base 
of the triangle A B S, the distance B S, which is the actual distance from the apex 
of the cornea to the eyewire of the glasses. This difference has been calculated 
and made into a table. (See Fig. 3). 
By taking the corrected measurements from the table and adding the depth of 
curve V (See Fig. 2) of the lens found in the depth of curve chart MSSS 2-0-112 the 
true distance from the apex of the cornea to the vertex of the lens may be cal- 
culated. 
The distance from the observers eye to the rule must be 16 inches. The 
patients line of vision must be at right angles to the vision of the observer. If 
these two principles are not followed an error will be introduced and the whole 
measurement worthless. 
This measurement is subject to a great many errors. The technique must be 
learned thoroughly and rigidly adhered to. The final calculation will be no more 
accurate than the measurement. 
Fig. 3 
Apparent 
Distance - 6 mm. 
7 mm. 
8 mm. 
9 mm. 
10 mm. 
11 mm. 
12 mm. 
13 mm. 
Actual - 6.4 mm. 
Di stance 
7.4%im. 
8. 5mm. 
9. 56mm. 
10.62ran. 
11. 69mm. 
12.74mm. 
13.81mm. 
Apparent 
Distance - 14 mm. 
15 mm. 
16 mm. 
17 mm. 
18 mm. 
Actual - 14.88 mm 
Distance 
15. 93 mm. 
17,00 mm. 
18.06 mm. 
19.12 mm. 
Section VIII - Page 17 ADJUSTING AND FITTING 
M.S.S.S. Chart 1-0-107 
CHANGE OF EFFECTIVE POWER OF A LENS AS THE DISTANCE FROM THE EYE IS VARIED. 
Distance, in mm,, from the cornea to the vertex of the lens. 
Sphere 
Power 
10 mm. 
11 mm. 
12 mm. 
13. 5mm, 
14 mm. 
15 mm. 
16 ram. 
17 mm. 
18 mm. 
19 mm. 
20 mm. 
1.00 
0.99 
0.998 
0.999 
1.00 
1.001 
1.002 
1.003 
1.004 
1.01 
1.012 
1.013 
1.50 
1.49 
1.495 
1.498 
1.50 
1.502 
1.504 
1.506 
1.509 
1.522 
1.524 
1.525 
2.00 
1.988 
1.99 
1.995 
2.00 
2.005 
2.01 
2.015 
2.02 
2.025 
2.028 
2.03 
2.50 
2.48 
2.486 
2.492 
2. 50 
2. 505 
2.511 
2.517 
2.523 
2.528 
2.534 
2.54 
3.00 
2.946 
2.966 
2.986 
3.00 
3.01 
3.02 
3.03 
3.04 
3.05 
3.06 
3.07 
3.50 
3.47 
3.48 
3.49 
3.50 
3.513 
3.526 
3.539 
3.552 
3.565 
3.578 
3.591 
4.00 
3.95 
3.966 
3.982 
4.00 
4.02 
4.04 
4.06 
4.08 
4.10 
4.12 
4.14 
4.50 
4.44 
4.46 
4.48 
4.50 
4.52 
4.54 
4.56 
4.58 
4.60 
4.62 
4.64 
5.00 
4.92 
4.946 
4.952 
5.00 
5.03 
5.06 
5.09 
5.12 
5.16 
5.19 
5.23 
5.50 
5.45 
5.466 
5.82 
5.50 
5.54 
5.58 
5.62 
5.66 
5.70 
5.75 
5.78 
6.00 
5.94 
5.96 
5.98 
6.00 
6.047 
6.094 
6.14 
6.188 
6.235 
6.282 
6.329 
6.50 
5. 36 
6.406 
6.446 
6.50 
6.55 
6.60 
6.65 
6.70 
6.75 
6.80 
6.85 
7.00 
6.82 
6.88 
6.94 
7.00 
7.05 
7. 10 
7.15 
7. 20 
7.25 
7.30 
7.35 
7.50 
7.35 
7.40 
7.45 
7.50 
7.56 
7.62 
7.68 
7.74 
7.80 
7.86 
7.92 
8.00 
7.82 
7.88 
7.94 
8.00 
8 .*08 
8.16 
8.24 
8.32 
8.40 
8.48 
8.56 
8.50 
8.33 
8.396 
8.45 
8.50 
8.584 
8.668 
8.752 
8.836 
8.92 
9.00 
9.088 
9.00 
8.75 
8.83 
8.91 
9.00 
9.087 
9.174 
9. 261 
9.348 
9.435 
9.552 
9.61 
10.00 
9.70 
9.80 
9.90 
10.00 
10. 107 
10.214 
10.321 
10.428 
10.535 
10.642 
10.75 
11.00 
10.75 
10.83 
10.91 
11.00 
11.15 
11.30 
11.45 
11.60 
11.75 
11.90 
12.05 
12.00 
11.67 
11.78 
11.89 
12.00 
12.22 
12.44 
12.66 
12.88 
13.00 
13.25 
13.50 
Section VIII - Page 18 SECTION IX 
STOCK CONTROL STOCK CONTROL 
There is a tendency to attach too little importance to the proper control of 
stock, with the result that a unit or installation cannot function to its peak of 
efficiency# 
With reference to a Base or Mobile Optical Repair Unit it can be readily 
visualized that excessive time would be consumed by the unnecessary surfacing of 
semi-finished blanks that normally would be stocked as finished lenses. The main- 
tenance of insufficient and improper stock levels in a Portable Unit will increase 
the number or prescriptions that cannot be processed and thereby reduce its ef- 
fectiveness in the servicing of field troops. 
The stock of lenses contained in each unit will have sufficient foci range to 
permit the processing of approximately 95% of all prescriptions and in order to 
maintain this percentage it will be necessary to keep the stock at the proper level. 
The stock of a Mobile Unit will approximate 18,000 lenses, 6,000 fronts, 7,500 
pair of temples and 1200 spectacle cases. The Portable Unit will contain 2400 
lenses, 600 fronts, 750 pairs of temples together with a nominal quantity of gas 
mask inserts and slipovers. 
The fronts and temples are contained in six cabinets. The fronts are arranged 
in eyesize order. Starting with the top lefthand drawer; 40 mm. eye with 20 mm. 
bridge is first, followed by 40 mm. eye with 22 mm. bridge, 40 mm. eye with 24 mm. 
bridge, 40 mm. eye with 26 mm. bridge, 42 mm. eye with 20 mm. bridge, and so on to 
46 mm. eye with 26 mm. bridge. 
The temples start with inch, followed by 6, 6M and 7 inches respectively. 
The lens stock is contained in eight cabinets. Starting with the upper left- 
hand drawer will be convex meniscus in numerical order of strength, namely + 0.25, 
4" 0.50, 4-0.75, etc., followed by concave meniscus in the same order. These will be 
followed by piano plus cylinders arranged in the same manner: 4- 0.25, + 0.50, 
+ 0.75, etc. 
The remaining cabinets will be taken up with compounds. The sequence for the 
sphero-cyl inders is, minus on plus, headed by: -0.25 4-0.25; -0.50 +0.25; -0.75 
+■0.25, etc. These will be followed by plus on plus in the same sequence. 
The fronts are arranged by the smallest eyesize broken down into bridge sizes 
followed by the next larger eyesize broken down into bridge size, etc. The temples 
are arranged according to length starting with the smaller. 
The sequence for meniscus lenses is, convex meniscus broken down in to foci 
starting with the smallest followed by concave meniscus broken down the same way; 
piano cylinders in the same manner. 
The compounds are arranged minus on plus first and plus on plus second. Each 
is divided into foci by cylindrical power and then spherical power. It can be 
readily seen that while the various repair units are sufficiently stocked it will 
be essential that consumed stock be replaced in the proper quantity at the proper 
time. 
The first stop in any stock control system is to make an accurate physical 
count, and enter the results at the head of the stock record cards in red ink. This 
gives a basis for all future entries and insures an accurate record when used in 
combination with a daily running inventory. The next step is to set up a maximum 
Section IX - Page 1 STOCK CONTROL 
and a minimum figure on each item. This insures a working stock on hand at all 
times. The system explained below is only one system, the Commanding Officer of 
your unit will set up his own system, but by familiarizing yourself with this basic 
method any other will differ only in procedure. 
In each cabinet, at the rear of each eye and bridge size, temple length, or 
foci, is an index card. On one side is given the description, catalog number (if 
any), eye and bridge size, temple length, or foci as the case may be, the maximum 
and minimum number to be carried in stock. A minimum should be established for each 
item based on twice the replacement time. In other words, if the location of the 
unit is such that it requires two weeks to get requisitioned stock, then the minimum 
should be four weeks disbursement. 
As soon as the minimum for each item has been established then that quantity, 
the minimum, should be tied up or marked in such a way that it can be positively 
identified. 
REPLENISHING 
The reorder point for each item will be established by the Unit Commander, this 
may or may not be the minimum. The depot from which the unit is to receive its 
stock will designate a regular reorder date, this should be adhered to except in 
case of emergency. 
Requisitions for replacements will be made on War Department forms provided for 
this purpose (see attached forms). Use a separate sheet for plus on plus, one for 
minus on plus, and one for temples and fronts. Concave meniscus, convex meniscus, 
and piano-cylinders have a separate heading on the compound sheet. 
When stock has been used down to the reorder point the index card for that 
particular item should be taken out and given to the clerk. He will note it on his 
order form and return it to its place with the side marked ORDERED facing out. 
When stock is received, and any of the minimum has been used, fill out the 
minimum and again ear mark that quantity. Place the rest of the stock in the working 
section. Turn the card around and cross off the date the stock was ordered. 
If stock has been ordered and you are forced to use the minimum to exhaustion, 
the card should be taken out again and an emergency order placed for the minimum 
amoun t. 
When requisitioning, especially machinery, tools, etc., be sure and give all 
possible information. Include make, model, serial number, sire, voltage, cycle, and 
any other description that may be helpful. This will facilitate replacements and 
eliminate correspondence with the depot. 
The importance of keeping a running inventory cannot be minimized. This gives 
an accurate daily picture of the stock status, facilitates accurate ordering and 
reduces the possibility of being out of much needed stock at a critical moment. 
There are many methods of maintaining a running inventory. The Commanding 
Officer of the unit is at liberty to set up any system that he may desire. 
The method used here at the school is one method, and will serve to guide you 
later. Any method set up will be essentially the same, varying only in procedure. 
Section IX - Page 2 STOCK CONTROL 
A 3" by 5" card is made out for each foci of lens, each eye and bridge size of 
front, and each length of temple. These have the necessary information for re- 
ordering on them as well as the maximum and minimum number and the reorder point. 
The card is divided into three columns. The first for the date, the second for any 
pertinent information such as voucher numbers, amount used, amount received, break- 
age etc., the third column shows the amount on hand. These cards are posted each 
day thus keeping an accurate picture of the stock status. 
Each quarter, or as the Commanding Officer may designate, a complete physical 
inventory is taken. The amount of the physical count is entered in the "amount on 
hand column" in red ink, and the notation made in the second column "As per Inven- 
tory" also in red ink. 
By using this system the stock clerk can go through the cards before the de- 
signated order date and complete his order according to the present demand and 
future needs. 
The following is an extraction from "The Procedure for the Operation of the 
Mobile, Base and Portable Optical Repair Units" as issued by the Office of the 
Surgeon General. 
REQUISITIONING OF FRAMES AND LENSES - Previously, The Surgeon General’s Of- 
fice advised the various mobile and base units that an automatic supply of frames 
and lenses to cover estimated requirements for three month periods would be es- 
tablished. However, this automatic flow program has been disapproved and under the 
existing policy, requisitions must be originated in the various theaters in the 
usual manner for these ophthalmic supplies. Inasmuch as a procurement program has 
been set up for frames and lenses to cover oversea requirements, it is necessary in 
the requisitioning of such ophthalmic supplies that frame sizes and lens foci be 
requisitioned only in such powers as have been placed in procurement and stocked. 
Requisitions should be placed for ophthalmic supplies covering a three month period 
in order that procurement programs may be kept in line with the stocks furnished, 
and it is essential that requisitions be made on this basis. Each requisition shall 
have attached a brief summary of the number of complete replacement jobs. Over- 
stocking of ophthalmic supplies on the part of mobile and base units can seriously 
interfere with the stock control, and may prove to be a serious handicap in the 
event the unit is moved fron one territory to another. 
In order that realistic needs can be requisitioned, some practicable form of 
stock control is recommended in order that more or less accurate requirements can be 
listed. This is necessary in view of the fact that productive facilities in this 
country are being heavily taxed, and accurate planning of the procurement program 
must be effected in order that requisitions placed by the mobile and base control 
repair units may be filled promptly. With stockpile quantities of expendable 
ophthalmic supplies available for oversea maintenance, there is no need for re- 
quisitioning supplies in excess of actual requirements, and adherence to the recom- 
mended procedures will minimize delays and procurement difficulties. 
Attached hereto is a chart of the frames and lenses presently available in 
stock for which a procurement program has been initiated. Again, it is emphasized 
that the requisitioning of ophthalmic supplies should be within this range of frames 
and foci of lenses. 
Also attached hereto is list showing the various stocks placed in procurement 
of surfacing suppl ies and the range of rough blanks and semi-finished meniscus. 
Section IX - Page 3 STOCK CONTROL 
SUMMARY - It is anticipated that the officers in charge of optical repair 
units will recognize the problems involved in the procurement and distribution of 
ophthalmic supplies in overseas theaters, and that they will cooperate to the fullest 
extent in the program described herein. Any reasonable and constructive suggestions 
for improvement of the program will receive every consideration, and this office 
urges the officers in charge of optical units to submit frequent report of their 
problems. These should be submitted through channels to the Office of The Surgeon 
General and the practice of some officers whereby their needs and criticisms are 
directed to acquaintances in the service or former associates in the optical in- 
dustry or profession is to be discouraged. 
FRONTS AND TEMPLES 
The following sizes of fronts and temples have been procured and are being 
carried in stock: 
Fronts (each) - - 
40 x 18 42 x 20 44 x 20 46 x 22 
40 x 20 42 x 22 44 x 22 46 x 24 
40 x 22 42 x 24 44 x 24 46 x 26 
40 x 24 42 x 26 44 x 26 
40 x 26 
Temples (pair) - - 
3#’, 4", 4**", 5" 
ROUGH BLANKS AND SEMI-FINISHED LENSES 
The following rough blanks and semi-finished lenses have been procured and 
are being carried in stock: 
1. Molded blanks (6 base curve, 6 mm. thick) 
2. +6 base curve semi-finished meniscus, 6 mm. thick 
3. -6 base curve semi-finished meniscus, 6 mm. thick 
4. Semi-finished toric cylinders, 6 base curve, 
6 mm. thick, as follows: 
+ 0.25 +2.50 +4.75 
+ 0.50 + 2.75 + 5.00 
+ 0.75 + 3.00 + 5.50 
+ 1.00 + 3.25 + 6.00 
+ 1.25 + 3.50 + 6.50 
+ 1.50 + 3.75 + 7.00 
+ 1.75 + 4.00 + 7.50 
+ 2.00 + 4.25 + 8.00 
+ 2.25 + 4.50 
Section IX - Page 4 STOCK CONTROL 
LENSES 
The following foci of lenses as indicated by the letter "X" have been procured 
and are being carried in stock: 
T3 
00 
■■o 
o\ 
o\ 
cn 
VI 
-c*. 
-p. 
■p. 
CO 
CO 
Co 
CO 
to 
to 
to 
to 
h-* 
H-k 
HA 
HA 
t— 
o 
<ji 
o 
ox 
o 
VI 
o 
•o 
VI 
tO 
o 
cn 
to 
o 
cn 
to 
o 
-o 
cn 
to 
o 
-o 
cn 
to 
§ 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
VI 
o 
Vl 
o 
cn 
o 
cn 
o 
cn 
o 
cn 
o 
cn 
O 
cn 
o 
cn 
o 
c-n 
0 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
+ SPHERES 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
■+ SPHERES 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
+ CYLINDERS 
Section IX - Page 5 STOCK CONTROL 
+ON + SPHERO-CYLINDERS 
m 
o 
m 
o 
m 
o 
m 
o 
m 
o 
o 
o 
o 
CN 
m 
t^ 
o 
<N 
m 
i-'- 
o 
CN 
m 
o 
m 
o 
rH 
rH 
rH 
rH 
cs 
CM 
cs 
CO 
CO 
-T 
.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
4.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
4.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
4. 50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
4.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
5.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
5.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
6.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
7.00 
X 
X 
Section IX - Page 6 STOCK CONTROL 
- ON + SPHERO-CYLINDERS 
00 
a\ 
tn 
tn 
-p. 
-tk 
■u 
to 
CO 
CO 
to 
to 
to 
to 
to 
H* 
o 
o 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
KJ 
o 
tn 
to 
o 
•o 
tn 
to 
o 
o 
tn 
to 
o 
o 
tn 
to 
o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
o 
tn 
O 
tn 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1. 25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
1.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
2.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.00 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.25 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.50 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
3.75 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
X 
4.00 
Section IX - Page 7 STOCK CONTROL 
FRAME REQUISITION SHEET 
FRONTS FOR H3878 FRAME 
ALL QUANTITIES IN SINGLES 
EYE 
SIZE 
40 
42 
44 
46 
BRIDGE SIZES 
20 MM 22 MM 24 MM 26 MM 
TEMPLES FOR ABOVE 
ALL QUANTITIES IN SINGLES 
3 1/2" 4” 4 1/2" 5" 
RIGHTS 
LEFTS 
DATE 
UNIT 
BY 
Section IX - Page 8 STOCK CONTROL 
LENS REQUISITION SHEET 
50 MM FINISHED 
ALL QUANTITIES IN PAIRS 
CX CC PL 
MEN. MEN. CYL. 
CYLINDRICAL 
.25 .37 .75 LOO 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 
pi ivn 
.25 
.37 
. 50 
.62 
.75 
1.00 
1. 25 
1.50 
1.75 
2.00 
2.25 
2.50 
2.75 
3.00 
3. 25 
3.50 
3.75 
4.00 
4. 25 
4.50 
5.00 
5.50 
6.00 
SPHERICAL 
Use one sheet for minus on plus or plus on plus. Use a second sheet for the compound 
not on the first sheet; and on the same sheet: Convex Meniscus, Concave Meniscus, 
and Plano Tories under their respective columns. 
Foci not listed should be requisitioned from Army Base Stock Depot on the Spectacle 
Requisition Form. 
Section IX - Page 9 SECTION X 
MARKING AND CUTTING MARKING AND CUTTING 
CENTERING 
A lens may have two centers, a geometrical center and an optical center. The 
geometrical center is at a point on the diameter of the lens half-way between the 
two points where the diameter cuts the circumference. 
(See Fig. 1.). The optical center is that point on 
the len? through which light passes unrefracted. In 
a spherical lens this point is the center of curva- 
ture, the thickest point of a convex lens and the 
thinnest point of a concave lens. A piano lens 
may be said to have an infinite number of optical 
centers since light may pass through it at any point 
without refraction. 
The geometrical center of a lens and the 
optical center may or may not be at the same point, 
according to the way the lens has been ground. The 
geometrical center of the lens may be determined by 
geometric measurement. The optical center can not 
be determined by geometric measurement; the finding of the optical center is termed 
"Centering". 
To find the optical center of a lens we employ a combination of the two 
principles already described and explained in neutralization, in fact centering is 
refined neutralization, using an optical cross. An optical cross consists of a 
horizontal line and a vertical line intersecting at right angles. The cross must be 
large enough so that when viewed through a lens the lines will extend beyond the 
edges of the lens. The average centering machine has an optical cross mounted on a 
sliding carriage so that it may be varied from one to thirty inches from the lens, 
depending on the focal length of the lens, thus enabling the operator to adjust the 
cross so the lines will always extend beyond the edges of the lens. 
When viewing the optical cross through a spherical lens the intersection of the 
cross and the optical center must coincide or the lines of the cross will not be 
continuous at the edges of the lens, (See Fig. 2). When the lines are not contin- 
uous at the periphery of the lens move the lens until they are, then the optical 
center of the lens is indicated by the intersection of the lines of the optical 
cross. 
In the case of a cylindrical lens, or one having a cylindrical element, it is 
necessary to determine its axis; the meridian in which the cylinder has no power. 
Methods for doing this have been explained under Neutralization. When using the 
centering machine, a lens measure is perhaps the quickest and easiest method of 
obtaining an approximate axis. 
Having found the approximate axis or base curve of the cylinder, hold the lens 
to the optical cross with the axis along the horizontal line of the cross, adjusting 
the lens until the horizontal line is continuous and unbroken through the lens. Now 
adjust the lens horizontally until the vertical line is also continuous and unbroken 
through the lens, now the lens is centered and on axis for 180 degrees. Place three 
dots on the lens: one where the lines of the cross intersect, indicating the 
optical center, and one at each edge of the lens on the horizontal line, indicating 
the axis line of the cylinder. 
Section X - Page 1 MARKING AND CUTTING 
Sphere lens off center 
Figure 2 
Sphere lens centered 
Cylindrical lens off axis and cylindrical lens with 
axis and center correct 
Axes are figured in degrees from zero to 180, clockwise. Axis at such-and-such 
a degree means that the base curve of the cylinder, the meridian of no power, is 
that many degrees from horizontal, or zero degrees, in a clockwise direction. 
(See Fig. 3.). 
To center a lens for any given axis, first 
center it for 180 degrees as explained above. 
Then place the lens on the protractor concave 
side up with the optical center dot at the 
intersection of the 180 and 90 degree lines and 
the two axis dots along the desired axis. Now 
make new dots along the zero or 180 degree line. 
This is the cutting or edging line. Erase the 
dots on the axis of the cylinder to avoid 
confusing it with the cutting line, Mark in the 
.cutting line with a grease pencil or some other 
suitable waterproof agent. This will not rub 
off upon later handling. Now when the lens is 
cut along this line the axis of the cylinder will 
stand at its correct degree in the fashioned 
lens. 
Some centering machines are made with a rotating optical cross. Such machines 
always have an automatic device which marks the horizontal or cutting line of the 
Figure 3 
Section X - Page 2 MARKING AND CUTTING 
le ns . When this type of machine is used, set the optical cross at the desired axis, 
hold the base curve of the cylinder along the axis line of the cross, and mark the 
lens with the automatic device, thus indicating the cutting line. 
PROCEDURE 
To center a spherical lens, hold it about eight (8) inches from the eye, and 
view an optical cross through it. Move the lens horizontally or vertically until 
all lines of the cross are continuous throughout the lens and unbroken at the edges. 
Place a dot on the lens where the lines of the cross intersect. 
To center a lens with a cylindrical element, using a stationary optical cross, 
first find the approximate axis of the cylinder. 
Holding this curve parallel with the horizontal line of the optical cross 
rotate and move the lens until the lines of the cross are continuous both within and 
outside the lens. Place three dots on the lens, one at each end of the horizontal 
line, and one at the intersection of the lines. 
Next place the lens on a protractor with the line of dots along the desired 
axis and place new dots along the horizontal line of the protractor. Then erase the 
original peripheral dots and mark in the cutting line with a grease pencil. 
DECENTERING 
DECENTRATION - The distance between the optical center of a lens and its 
actual or geometrical center measured in millimeters. 
It is often impractical to fashion a pair of glasses so that the patient’s 
eyes will look through the optical center and the geometrical center at the same 
time. So, for cosmetic purposes, and to obtain prism where desired, the optical 
center and the geometrical center are separated. 
PROCEDURE 
The protractor has a section marked off in one millimeter squares. (See 
Fig. 4). Place the lens on the pro- 
tractor with the cutting line along the 
0-180 degree line, with the optical center 
on the 0 mark of the millimeter grid. 
Move the optical center to the right 
or left, as the case may be, the desired 
distance of decentration. Place a new dot 
at the 0 point of the grid. 
Erase the optical center dot. The 
new dot will be the guide for cutting and 
will be the geometrical center of the 
fashioned lens. Thus the optical center 
will be decentered from the geometrical 
center the desired distance in the finished lens. 
Figure 4 
LENS MEASURE 
Lens measures are made to measure the dioptric curve of lenses, foci of 
lenses are figured from curves. Lens measures are made for use on glass having 
Section X - Rage 3 MARKING AND CUTTING 
a refractive index of 1.523, which is the standard index of glass used for making 
opt ha Imic lenses . 
It is often stated that lens measures are not a good method of finding the 
power of a lens , but that does not mean that a lens measure is not accurate to 
measure curves of lenses. The power of a lens is derived not only from the curves 
of each surface, but curves combined with thickness and optical density of the 
glass. Surfaced lenses are made with an allowance for vertex refraction. According 
to a lens measure, a lens ground piano on each surface is piano in focus, and a 
lens surfaced minus 6.00 on one surface and plus 6.00 on the other, if very thin, 
will also be practically piano. But if the lens is ground minus 6.00 on one surface 
and plus 6.00 on the other surface, leaving a thickness of three or four millimeters, 
the lens would have a power of approximately plus 0.12. 
As another example, a lens having curves of minus 6.00 and plus 10.75, will 
neutralize as a plus 5.00 diopter, and only measure plus 4.75 diopter according to a 
lens measure. The way to figure accurate focus with a lens measure; if a curve 
measures between minus 6.00 and minus 6.12, the curve is called by the smaller nu* 
meral in minus, in this case minus 6.00, and if the curve is between plus 6.87 and 
plus 7.00, or plus 7.87 to plus 8.00, call the curve by the larger numeral in plus. 
Lens measures resemble a pocket watch in appearance, some have all dial 
markings in black, while others have red and black numerals. The b lack-numera led 
variety measures minus, to the right of zero or piano, and plus to the left of zero. 
When using the measure having both red and black numerals, plus is indicated by the 
black numerals and minus by the red numerals. 
Lens measures are made with three steel points, the two end points stationary 
and the center point movable. The center point governs the dial hand shewing the 
curve in question. The dial 
hand at rest may point to 
any numeral on the dial, 
but when the points of 
the measure are placed on 
a flat surface the hand will 
register icro. (See Fig. 5.). 
A sphere focus lens is 
ground with one spherical 
curve on each surface. To 
ascertain the focus of a lens 
by curves, add the curves of 
the lens algebraically. 
Example: If a lens has curves 
of plus 6.00 on one surface 
and minus 10.00 on the other*, 
the focus is minus 4.00 
diopters, and if a lens is 
plus 4.25 on one surface and minus 1.25 on the other, the focus would be plus 3.00 
diopters. A cylindrical surface has two different curves on one surface. The 
difference between the weaker and the stronger curve of a cylinder is the power of 
that cylinder. As an example: If a surface is piano in one meridian and has a 
minus 2.00 curve in the other the lens has a minus 2.00 diopter cylinder, or if a 
lens has a plus 6.00 curve in one meridian and plus 9.00 in the other the power of 
the cylinder is plus 3.00 d iopters . 
Points Against a 
Plane Surface 
Points Free 
Figure 5 
Section X - Rge 4 MARKING AND CUTTING 
A lens ground with a cylindrical element has two curves on one surface and a 
spherical curve on the other surface, the combination of curves making a lens 
compound or piano cylindrical. The axis of a cylinder according to curve is the 
weakest curve on the cylindrical surface. The weakest cylinder curve or axis curve 
is called the base curve or the fundamental curve of the lens. The weaker or base 
curve added algebraically to the sphere curve on the opposite surface of the lens 
equals the sphere dioptric power. 
As an example: A lens having curves of plus 6.00 to plus 9.00 on one surface 
and minus 8.00 on the other surface is in focal strength, minus 2.00 diopter sphere 
combined with a plus 3.00 diopter cylinder. A lens equivalent in focus to this but 
ground on another base curve is a lens having curves of piano to plus 3.00 on one 
surface and minus 2.00 sphere curve on the other surface. 
PROCEDURE 
Hold lens in left hand, with finger-tips along edge of lens, convex surface of 
lens outward. Hold lens measure in right hand, placing the measuring points as close 
to the center of the lens as possible, holding the measure at right angles to the 
lens. Hold the measure stationary and rotate the lens about three fourths turn. If 
the hand of the measure moves the lens has a cylinder on that surface. The power of 
the cylinder will be indicated by the difference between the lesser and the greater 
reading. 
Repeat this operation on the other surface of the lens obtaining the difference 
between the curve of the concave surface and the least reading of the cylindrical 
surface for the sphere power, and the difference between the readings on the 
cylindrical surface will give the power and sign of the cylinder. 
CUTTING WITH A HAND DIAMOND 
The hand diamond is usually a diamond point held in a metal clasp with a 
wooden handle. The position in which it is held and the pressure exerted together 
determine the cutting possibilities. The customary method being to hold it as one 
holds a pen or pencil and apply it at a 90 degree angle to the surface of the lens. 
The technique requires practice and since the diamond may be ruined by improper 
angle and pressure, the student would better practice with a pen or pencil until 
proficient. Holding the cutter in vertical position and making not more than two 
sweeps around the pattern should become habitual. In no case should the cutting 
overlap, for there is no surer way of ruining the point of a diamond than by making 
one cut over the other. 
The novice must also learn to distinguish between a scratch and a cut of the 
diamond. A scratch of the diamond does not penetrate the surface of the lens to any 
extent making it very difficult to break the glass away evenly. A good cut can be 
seen through the edge of the lens, penetrating the glass, and it can be broken away 
cleanly and evenly. 
The diamond that cuts with a very slight pressure is not necessarily the best, 
for a diamond that needs definite pressure, while not rasping, or scratching, is 
more likely to cut through a thick lens. 
PATTERNS 
In cutting with a hand diamond, cutting patterns must be employed. These may 
be made of xylonite, sheet metal, or other suitable substance, the proper thickness 
Section X - Ffage 5 MARKING AND CUTTING 
being 1/100 of an inch. The pattern must be marked with an optical cross whose 
point of intersection is geometrically centered. The way in which the diamond is to 
be used in conjunction with the pattern is usually marked on the diamond by a 
flattened surface of the diamond clasp which should be held parallel with the edge 
of the pattern. 
In cutting a lens for hand edging, it is necessary that the pattern be of the 
size and shape of the required lens. In this case the spread or distance of the 
hand diamond from the pattern is ample to allow for edging. When cutting a lens 
for an automatic machine edger, it is best to use a pattern a size larger. This 
makes the lens, when cut, about 2 mm. oversize. This use of an oversized pattern 
is especially important where a rimless lens is desired, this allows for slight 
flakes or irregularities in the cutting of the lens. 
PROCEDURE 
Have lens centered for cutting and edging. 
Select a cutting pattern, the size and shape of the required lens if it is to 
be a hand-edged lens. If it is intended for automatic or rimless edging select a 
pattern one size larger than the required lens. 
Hold the pattern on the lens, the horizontal line of the pattern on the cutting 
line of the lens, the concave surface of the lens upward, the left thumb holding the 
pattern to the lens, the thumb side of the first finger of the left hand under the 
lens, resting the surface of the lens on the bench for support. Holding the cutting 
diamond at right angles to the surface of the lens, with the flattened steel portion 
of the handle parallel with the pattern, begin at one end of the pattern at an 
average pencil stroke speed. Now turn the lens so as to cut the other half of the 
pattern, taking care not to overlap the diamond cut. 
The lens is now ready for chipping or crumbling. 
CHIPPING AND CRUMBLING 
This process constitutes the removal of the surplus glass outside of the 
diamond cut. When it is removed by breaking away cleanly and in fairly large-sized 
fragments, it is known as chipping, the ideal method. When this cannot be done and 
the surplus glass has to be "chewed" away, it is called crumbling. 
For either operation a pair of chipping pliers is used, having a spring device 
in the handle which holds the jaws apart. The jaws are oblong and at right angles 
to the handle, their inner surface, or grasping surface, being corrugated or file 
like in appearance. The chipping of the glass is done with the ends of the jaws of 
the pliers. The pliers should never reach inside the line of cut. They should be 
made to grasp the edge of the lens outside the diamond cut with just sufficient 
grip to hold firmly. The breaking away of the glass is not accomplished by pressure 
of the jaws on the glass, this will splinter the lens across the cut, but accom- 
plished by twisting the pliers down and away from the cut. 
If the diamond cut on the glass is good the glass will break away easily and 
cleanly. If the cut is a mere scratch it will not; and the crumbling method must be 
used. A lens can be brought to edging shape and size by crumbling alone, but it is 
slow and at best a poor method, involving risk of breaking the lens. 
Section X - Page 6 MARKING AND CUTTING 
PROCEDURE 
Hold the lens in the left hand with the cut surface upward. Place the thumb 
on the top surface and the thumb side of the first finger on the under surface even 
with the cut on the side away from you. Apply the jaws of the pliers to the surplus 
glass, next to the finger on the underside, at the thinnest portion of the surplus 
glass, be sure the jaws do not overlap the cut. Then by a twisting motion of the 
hand and wrist, twist down and away from the lens chipping the glass cleanly. 
Work around the lens in a clock-wise manner turning the lens in your left hand 
as you proceed, as you would turn a piece of paper when cutting it with a pair of 
scissors. 
If the glass does not give or break way easily, resort to crumbling. Use the 
same method of holding the lens and pliers, taking not more than a millimeter or 
two bite with each motion. 
Section X - Ffege 7 MARKING AND CUTTING 
INSTALLATION - Wipe off the grease applied to parts for protection during 
shipping. Oil thoroughly for ease of operation, and attach Lever "G" to the base of 
the machine with the taper pin provided for that purpose. 
CHANGING PATTERNS - Push back Lever "A", which removes contact shoe "C" 
away from the pattern. Turn knurled collar "B" to the left and pattern will 
drop down onto lens table. Pattern can be put in operative position by simply 
placing on Chuck "E" and pushing up in place. Change patterns for shape only. Size 
is controlled by turning handwheel ”P". 
SETTINGS FOR SIZE - Turn micrometer handwheel "P" until scale nN” points to 
the size wanted. When machine is received, this adjustment should be verified before 
doing any actual work. To do this, cut a sample lens to any convenient shape and 
size and measure the major axis. If the dial does not read correctly according to 
the size just cut, loosen screw ”0” and turn dial "N” until the scale registers 
correctly for that size. 
Any convenient allowance may be made for edging. Once scale "N" is set, screw 
"Q" should be tightened firmly and the adjustment left unchanged, except when the 
diamond is reset, at which time it is well to recheck for size. 
ADJUSTABLE HEAD - To cut piano, concave or convex lenses, set the head in 
proper position according to scale "M” by engaging latch "L” in the proper hole. 
Always make sure that the diamond point is as nearly radial to the curve of the lens 
as possible. 
LENS HOLDER - To raise and move lens holder "F" away from the lens table, 
throw handle "H" to the right. This lens holder has been carefully adjusted before 
leaving the factory and should not be tampered with. 
CONTACT SHOE - Contact Shoe "C” has also been carefully adjusted at the 
factory by regulating screw "D" so that the shoe follows the outline of the pattern 
faithfully, regardless of the shape and size of the lens being cut. When cutting 
octagonal lenses we recommend turning crank "K” more slowly than when cutting 
regular shapes. 
ALIGNING AXIS ON LENS TABLE - To center and align the axis accurately on 
the lens table, head of machine may be tilted back out of the way by pushing knob 
"J" straight back. This provides a clear view of the lens and lens table and the 
operator can look directly down on the lens thereby assuring proper centering and 
alignment of axis. 
CUTTING OPERATIONS - To raise lens against diamond, press on lever "G”, 
This lever is very delicately balanced and very slight pressure is required. To 
rotate lens, turn handle "K” in a clockwise motion. The diamond should make a 
complete revolution and should NEVER be run over the cut twice, as the cutting point 
might be destroyed. 
A good way to prevent this is to start cutting with crank "K” at the bottom, 
and make one complete revolution, which is readily indicated when the crank is again 
at the bottom. 
LUBRICATION - Once a month the spindles of this machine, at the points 
marked "Oil” in (Fig. 1.), should be oiled with a good grade of light machine oil. 
The other movable parts also should be lubricated from time to time according to the 
frequency with which the cutter is used. 
Section X - Page 8 MARKING AND CUTTING 
CROSS CYLINDERS 
Some years ago it was customary in making an examination to test each meridian 
of an eye separately. Prescriptions were written and lenses were made in cross 
cylinder form. In flat form this could be easily done. But with the advent of the 
curved form of lens it became increasingly difficult. 
There are some practitioners who still cling to the old method and write their 
prescriptions as crossed cylinders even though the lenses are to be made as sphero- 
cylinders, or torics. 
It was found that a prescription written as crossed cylinders may always be 
transposed to an equivalent sphero-cy1inder lens with either a plus or minus 
cylinder power. Where the two cylinders are at right angles, this transposition is 
comparatively simple. If, however, they are crossed obliquely, the computation 
becomes somewhat complicated and uncertain. 
A mathematical solution of the problem of obliquely crossed cylinders require 
the application of higher mathematics, particularly if the thicknesses and separa- 
tions of the individual elements are to be considered. In any mathematical solution 
the location of the resultant axis with respect to the axes of the original cylinders 
is largely a matter of conjecture. 
The graphical method given here is sufficiently accurate for all practical use 
and has the advantage that it gives the definite position Qf the resultant axis. 
1. If the axes are crossed at 90 degrees. 
(A) Two crossed cylinders of equal power are equivalent to a sphere of 
the same power as either. 
Ex. +1.00 axis 90° ~ +1.00 c axis 180° is equivalent to +1.00 sph. 
(B) Two crossed cylinders of unequal power are equivalent to a lens 
having a sphere power equal to the second combined with a cylinder of 
power equal to the difference between the first and second, with the 
axis the same as that of the first. 
Ex. +2.50 c axis +1.00 c axis 90° is equivalent to +1.00 so +1.50 c 
axis 180°. 
2. If the axes are crossed obliquely. 
(A) Graphical solution. 
This solution may be best understood by means of an example. Let us 
suppose that the Rx is -2.50 cyl, axis 30°c +1.75 cyl. axis 90°. 
(1) Transpose so that both cylinders are of the same sign, 
preferably + . Transposed the Rx is -2.50 sph.O +2.5 0 
cyl axis 120°O +1.75 cyl. axis 90°. 
(2) Find the angle between the axes of the two cylinders. 
120° - 90° = 30. 
(3) Multiply this angle by 2 and subtract the double angle 
from 180°, 30° x 2 = 60°, 180° - 60° = 120°. 
(4) Lay off this angle with the protractor. This can be done 
conveniently by using a rather thin piece of paper. 
Place it over an ordinary protractor and with the aid of 
a ruler trace the lines with a sharp pencil. 
Section X - Page 9 MARKING AND CUTTING 
(5) Mark one side of the angle 4-2.50 cyl. axis 120°, and mark 
the other side of the angle 41.75 cyl axis 90°. Note 
that the sides of the angle will not conform to the 120° 
and 90° meridians. 
(6) On the side marked 42.50, measure 2.5 units of length. Use 
inches or any other convenient unit. On the side marked 
+1.75 measure 1.75 of the same unit. 
(7) Complete the triangle. Measure the third side, using the 
same unit of length as before. In this problem the third 
side measures 3,75. The power of the required resultant 
cylinder is 4-3.75 D. 
THE NEXT STEP IS TO DETERMINE THE AXIS OF THIS RESULTANT CYLINDER 
(8) Using the protractor, measure the three angles of the 
triangle and mark each angle with its power. The sum of 
the three angles must always equal 180°. In this exam- 
ple the angles are 24°, 36°, and 120°. 
(9) Divide each of the angles by two. In this problem 
36° - 2 =18<> and 24 4 2 = 12°. 
Note that the 36° angle is adjacent to, or touching the 
sides of the triangle marked 90° and that the 24° angle 
is adjacent to the side marked 120°. 
(10) The resultant cylinder axis is 18° away from 90°, and 
12° away from 120°. Add the 18° to 90° or subtract the 
12° from 120°. The result is 108° in both cases, and 
the resultant cylinder axis is 108°. 18° + 90° = 108° 
Section X - Page 10 MARKING AND CUTTING 
and 120° -12° = 108°. It now remains to determine the 
sphere power of the resultant lens. 
(11) Add the two given cylinder powers, and from that sum 
subtract the resultant cylinder power found in 7. 
+2.50 +1.75 = 4.25 
+4.25 -3.75 = 0.50 
(12) Divide this result by 2. This gives the sphere power 
resulting from the combination of the two obliquely 
crossed cylinders. In this problem, +0.50 2 = 0.25. 
The sphere power due to the crossed cylinder is +0.2SD. 
(13) Combine this sphere with the original sphere of the 
transposed Rx, if there is any. This gives the required 
resultant sphere power. In this problem -2.50 +0.25 
= -2.25 D. 
(14) From 13, 7, and 10 write the final Rx. 
He re it is: 
The original prescription -- 
-2.50 cyl axis 30°C? +1.75 cyl axis 90° is equivalent 
to -2.25 +3.75 cyl axis 108°. 
(15) Verify the solution by neutralizing the original obliquely 
crossed cylinder lenses with +2.25 sph C? -3.75 cyl 
axis 108°. 
The above method is based on the following mathematical formulae: 
Let A and B be the powers in diopters of the given obliquely crossed cylinders, 
and a the angle at which they are crossed. To find the resultant cylinder C, 
its angle b with the axis A, and the power of the resultant sphere S. 
(1) C _ A _ B (3) s in 2 b = sin 2a 
sin 2 a sin 2 (a-b) sin 2 b 
(2) C2 = A2 + B2 + 2 AB cos 2 a (4 ) S = A ~ \ z C 
Section X - Page 11 MARKING AND CUTTING 
Section X - Page 12 MARKING AND CUTTING 
DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATING THE NEW NO. 82-A 
SHURON CUTTER 
Lens Cutting Wheel 1. 
7. Lens Clamping Disc 
8. Lever to Clamp Lens 
Lens Table 2 
Cutting Wheel Pressure 
Lever 3 
9. Steady Rest for (8) 
R 
Steady Rest 4. 
Index Dial 5. 
10. Crank to Rotate 
Table 
Contact Point at Edge 
of Former 6. 
L 
11. Release Lever for 
Changing Formers 
U 
12. Lens Former and 
• Spindle 
Place Edger Former of desired shape and difference on former spindle (12). An 
unique, spring-controlled, locking device makes it easy to put on or remove formers. 
Push Former Contact Lever (11) back against base. This insures positive 
contact between contact point (6) and former (12). 
Set Index Dial (5) to required diameter (or maximum dimension of unedged lens). 
An allowance of 2 mm. on odd shapes is recommended. 
Place lens on Lens Table (2). Direct overhead view insures accuracy. 
Hook thumb of right hand on Steady Rest (9) and pull Locking Lever (8) forward 
gently until snap indicates that it has locked. This brings Lens Clamping Disc (7) 
down on lens. 
Hook second finger of left hand on Steady Rest (4). Place first finger under- 
neath and thumb above Pressure Lever (3). Press down easily, bringing Lens Cutting 
Wheel (1) in contact with lens. A few experiments will enable each operator to 
"feel" the pressure required for most efficient cutting. 
Rotate crank (10). Increase pressure on Lever (3) until wheel cuts glass. 
Three turns of handle (10) will rotate lens table (2) once. Do not run over cut the 
second time. When wheel starts to cut turn handle (10) steadily and quite rapidly. 
Do not use too much pressure. 
Push back Lever (8) to release lens. 
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 
For odd shapes requiring rights and lefts, reverse former on spindle. 
To remove cutting wheel, place finger-nail or penknife behind wire lock and 
press (or pull) forward. The entire cutting wheel assembly will come out easily. 
Section X - Rage 13 MARKING AND CUTTING 
To replace with new wheel, place wheel in small opening and snap wire lock back into 
original position. 
To adjust for wear, move former contact point (6) in by loosening lock nut L* 
and using screw-driver on screw L. Relock. 
To replace soft rubber pad on 
lens table (2) unscrew lower knurled 
ring (R) and lift out entire upper 
ring assembly. When inserting new pad 
make certain that one of the cross 
lines on the new pad coincides with 
the witness mark on the inside edge of 
ring. Replace ring assembly with pin 
slipping into notch of inside plate. 
Press down firmly and tighten lower 
knurled ring. 
If clamping lever will not stay 
latched in forward position, stop knob 
should be filed down slightly. This will let the lever go a little farther forward 
so that it will stay in place- 
STOP 
KNOB 
CLAMPING LEVER (8) 
Should pressure of clamping disc (7) on lens be insufficient to hold without 
slipping, follow instructions detailed below: 
I 
TO CLAMP LENS TIGHTER 
LOOSEN THIS SCREW 
Va of a turn or less AT A y 
TIME AND TIGHTEN OPPOSITE SCREW/ 
(IN THE REAR) FIRMLY 
Section X - Page 14 MARKING AND CUTTING 
DIAGRAM SHOWING HOW TO "TRUE-UP' CUTTER WHEEL 
Place flat piece of glass "A" on cutting table "B" -- clamp down "C" by pulling 
forward "D" -- bring cutting wheel arm "E" in contact with glass by pressing "F" -- 
loosen screw "G" and place "E" in vertical position then lock by tightening "G" . 
Sect ion X - Rage 15 MARKING AND CUTTING 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
14 Screw 5-40xH" Fil. in 
3473 
31 Screw 1,4-20x% Fil. in 
3511 
78 Nut 1,4-20 in 3520 
85 Screw Headless 
in 3507 
3441 Screw for contact point 
in sizing dial 3511 
3457 Handle for dial spring 
lever 
3458 Stud for crank handle 
(3459) 
3466 Arm for clamp collar 
3467 Pin for collar arm 
3468 Screw for pressure crank 
in 3471 
3470 Guide blocks for clamp 
arm 
3471 Pressure crank (2/3468) 
3472 Pressure spring for 
clamp collar 
3473 Pressure arm for clamp 
collar (2/14-3472) 
3487 Clips for pins in pressure 
link 
3504 Former contact point 
(887) 
3506 Former contact point 
check nut 
REPAIR PARTS LIST 
FOR THE 
SHURON NO. 82-A ALL-SHAPE CUTTER 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
3507 Former contact point 
arm 
3511 Arm for sizing dial (31- 
3441-3513) 
3512 Cam for sizing dial 
3513 Contact point for sizing 
dial cam 
3514 Spring for sizing dial 
3515 Lever for sizing dial 
spring (3516-3457-3458) 
3516 Small pin in spring lever 
3517 Large pin in spring lever 
3518 Sizing dial 
3519 Screw for sizing dial 
3520 Spindle for sizing dial 
3521 Washer for sizing dial 
spindle 
3554 Allen set screw wrench 
3555 Pressure clamp lever 
3557 Pressure clamp lever link 
3558 Pressure clamp lever link 
pins 
3560 Shaft for clamp lever 
3564 Clamp lever arm (3556- 
3559-1824) 
3567 Trigger for pressure 
lever 
3568 Screws for pressure lever 
trigger 
Section X - Page 16 MARKING AND CUTTING 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
3532 Stud for Clamp Arm 
3533 Ball pin assembly for 
upper clamp arm (3526- 
2/3527-3528-3529-3547- 
2/3548) 
3535 Rubber table (3534- 
3537) 
3538 Rubber table ring 
3539 Clamp ring for table 
(3540-3541) 
3540 Pin for Clamp Ring 
3541 Screw for Clamp Ring 
3543 Lower Ring Nut for 
Clamping Pad 
3547 Nut for Ball Pin 
3548 Rubber Washer for Ball 
Pin 
3565 Annular Ball Bearing 
3566 Pressure Lever (3579) 
3569 Support for Cutter Arm 
3570 Collar to support Cutter 
Arm (3576) 
3571 Shaft for Pressure Lever 
3572 Spring for Pressure 
Lever 
3576 Screw for Cutter Arm 
Collar in 3570 
3579 Screw for Pressure Lever 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
67 Screw 10-30xTV' Head- 
less pointed in 3530 
3477 Rack for angling cutter 
arm (3478-3480) 
3479 Spring for rack 3477 
3486 Plunger for Cutting 
Spindle 3499 
3490 Cutter Spindle Arm 
(3491-3492) 
3491 Cutter Spindle Arm 
Clamp Screw, large 
3492 Cutter Spindle Arm 
Clamp Screw, small 
3493 Pinion Spindle for Cutter 
Arm 
3494 Pinion Spindle screw 
3495 Pinion Spindle washer 
3499 Cutter Spindle Assembly 
(3484-3485-3488- 
14/3489-3503) 
3503 Cutter Wheel Assembly 
(3481-3482-3483) 
3528 Rubber Ring for Clamp 
Arm 
3530 Top Clamping Arm (67- 
3531) 
3531 Seat for Clamp Arm 
Screw 
Section X - Page 17 MARKING AND CUTTING 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
39 Screw 7-40xT:V Headless 
Flat in 3450 
681 Pin in 3544 
3450 Ratchet Crank (39) 
3451 Pin for Pawl in 3450 
3452 Spring for Pawl in 3450 
3453 Bevel Gear Pinion and 
Spindle 
3455 Screw for Crank Spindle 
3456 Bushing for Crank 
Spindle 
3457 Handle for Crank 
3458 Spindle for Crank Handle 
3462 Ratchet Crank Assembly 
(3450-3451-3452-3453- 
3455-3456-3457-3458) 
3464 Clamping Collar 
3465 Pin for Clamping Collar 
3474 Screw for Main Spindle 
3491 Screw for Main Spindle 
Bearing 3549 
Stock 
No. DESCRIPTION 
3508 Former Pin in Main 
Spindle 
3536 Spindle to raise rubber 
pad 
3542 Main Table Spindle 
(3474-2/3508) 
3544 Holder for Former (681- 
3545-3546) 
3546 Spring for Former Holder 
in 3554 
3549 Main Spindle Bearing 
3550 Gear on Main Spindle 
(2/3551) 
3551 Screw on Main Spindle 
3561 Trigger for Clamp Lever 
3582 Screw for Trigger 3561 
3575 Main Frame (2/3491- 
3549-2/3551-3577- 
2/3578) 
3577 Plug Screw in Main 
Frame 
3578 Drive Type Oiler 
Section X - Page 18 MARKING AND CUTTING 
These parts are not numbered in illustrations and are available only 
in assembly numbers shown in description of part. 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
887 
Pin in 3504 
3459 
Washer for 3458 
3478 
Stem for rack in 3477 
3480 
Rivet for rack stem in 
3477 
3482 
Clamp for cutting wheel 
in 3503 
3483 
Shaft for cutting wheel 
in 3503 
3484 
Spindle for cutter in 3499 
3485 
Nut for cutter spindle in 
3499 
3488 
Sleeve for cutter spindle 
in 3499 
3489 
Steel Ball ; 14 required 
in 3499 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3526 
Ball Pin for Clamp Arm 
in 3533 
3527 
Ball for Clamp Arm in 
3533 
3529 
Support for Rubber Ring 
in 3533 
3534 
Rubber Disc only in 3535 
3536 
Spindle for Rubber Disc 
in 3535 
3537 
Pin for Rubber Disc in 
3535 
3545 
Bushing for Former 
Holder in 3544 
3556 
Arm for Clamp Lever in 
3564 
3559 
Shaft for Lever Arm in 
3564 
These parts are not numbered in illustrations but may be had when 
necessary by ordering these numbers. 
3474 
Rubber Foot Pad for 
Main Frame 
3481 
Steel Cutting Wheel 
only 
3496 
Adaptor for A.O. Co. 
Formers 
3522 
Leather packing for 3549 
3523 
Paper packing for 3549 
3562 
Screw for Trigger No. 
3561 
Section X - Page 19 MARKING AND CUTTING 
DECENTRATION CHART 
MSSS Chart 1 -C-0-109 
DEC. 
0.5m/m 
1.Om/m 
1.5m/m 
2.Om/m 
2.5m/m 
3 . Om/m 
3.5 m/m 
4.Om/m 
4.5m/m 
5.Om/m 
Powe r 
0.25 
0.01 
0.02 
0. 04 
0.05 
0.06 
0.08 
0.09 
0.10 
0.11 
0.12 
0.50 
0.02 
0.05 
0.08 
0.10 
0.12 
0.15 
0.18 
0.20 
0.22 
0.25 
0.75 
0.04 
0.08 
0.11 
0.15 
0.19 
0.22 
0.26 
0 .30 
0.34 
0.38 
1 . 00 
0.05 
0.10 
0.15 
0.20 
0.25 
0.30 
0.35 
0.40 
0.45 
0.50 
1 .25 
0.06 
0.12 
0.19 
0.25 
0.31 
0.38 
0.44 
0.50 
0.56 
0.62 
1.50 
0.08 
0.15 
0.22 
0.30 
0.38 
0.45 
0.52 
0.60 
0.68 
0.75 
1 .75 
0.09 
0.18 
0.26 
0.35 
0.44 
0.52 
0.61 
0.70 
0.79 
0.88 
2.00 
0.10 
0.20 
0.30 
0.40 
0.50 
0.60 
0.70 
0.80 
0.90 
1 .00 
2 .25 
0.11 
0.22 
0.34 
0.45 
0.56 
0.68 
0.79 
0.90 
1 A1 
1 .12 
2.50 
0.12 
0.25 
0.38 
0.50 
0.62 
0.75 
0.88 
1 .00 
1 .12 
1 .25 
2.75 
0.14 
0.28 
0.41 
0.55 
0.69 
0.82 
0.96 
1.10 
1 .24 
1.38 
3 . 00 
0.15 
0.30 
0.45 
0.60 
0.75 
0.90 
1 . 05 
1.20 
1 .35 
1 .50 
3 .25 
0.16 
0.32 
0.49 
0.65 
0.81 
0.98 
1.14 
1 .30 
1 .46 
1 . 62 
3.50 
0.18 
0.35 
0.52 
0.70 
0,88 
1 .05 
1 .22 
1.40 
1 .58 
1 .75 
3.75 
0.19 
0.38 
0.56 
0.75 
0.94 
1 .12 
1 .31 
1 .50 
1 .69 
1 . 88 
4.00 
0.20 
0.40 
0.60 
0.80 
1 . 00 
1 .20 
1.40 
1 .60 
1 . 80 
2.00 
4.25 
0.21 
0.42 
0.64 
0.85 
1 .06 
1 .28 
1 .49 
1 .70 
1 .91 
2.12 
4.50 
0.22 
0.45 
0.68 
0.90 
1 .12 
1 .35 
1 .58 
1 . 80 
2.02 
2.25 
4.75 
0.24 
0.48 
0.71 
0.95 
1.19 
1 .42 
1 . 66 
1 . 90 
2.14 
2.38 
5.00 
0.25 
0.50 
0.75 
1 . 00 
1 .25 
1.50 
1 . 75 
2.00 
2.25 
2.50 
5 .25 
0.26 
0.52 
0.79 
1 . OS 
1 .31 
1 .58 
1 . 84 
2.10 
2.36 
2.62 
5.50 
0.28 
0.55 
0.82 
1.10 
1 .38 
1 .65 
1.92 
2.20 
2.48 
2.75 
5.75 
0.29 
0.58 
0.86 
1 .15 
1 .44 
1 . 72 
2.01 
2 .30 
2.59 
2.88 
Section X - Page 20 MARKING AND CUTTING 
MSSS Chart 1-C^0-109 
Dec . 
0.5m/m 
1 .Om/m 
1.5m/m 
2.Om/m 
2.5m/m 
3.Om/m 
3.Sm/m 
4.Om/m 
4.5m/m 
5.Om/m 
Power 
6.00 
0.30 
0.60 
0.90 
1.20 
1.50 
1 . 80 
2.10 
2.40 
2.70 
3.00 
6.25 
0.31 
0.62 
0.94 
1 .25 
1 .56 
1 . 88 
2.19 
2.50 
2.81 
3.17 
6.50 
0.32 
0.65 
0.98 
1 .30 
1 .62 
1 .25 
2 .28 
2.60 
2.97 
3 .25 
6.75 
0.34 
0.68 
1 .01 
1 .35 
1 .69 
2.02 
2 .36 
2.70 
3.04 
3.38 
7.00 
0.35 
0.70 
1 . 05 
1 .40 
1 .75 
2.10 
2 .45 
2 . 80 
3.15 
3.50 
7.25 
0.36 
0.72 
1 . 09 
1 .45 
1 .81 
2.18 
2 .54 
2.90 
3 .26 
3.62 
7.50 
0.38 
0.75 
1 .12 
1 .50 
1 . 88 
2.25 
2.62 
3.00 
3 .38 
3.75 
7.75 
0.39 
0.78 
1.16 
1 .55 
1 . 94 
2.32 
2.71 
3.10 
3.49 
3.88 
8.00 
0.40 
0.80 
1.20 
1 .60 
2.00 
2.40 
2.80 
3.20 
3.60 
4.00 
8.25 
0,41 
0.82 
1 .24 
1 . 65 
2.06 
2.46 
2.89 
3.30 
3.71 
4.12 
8.50 
0.42 
0.85 
1 .28 
1 .70 
2.12 
2 .55 
2.98 
3.40 
3.87 
4.25 
8.75 
0.44 
0.88 
1 .31 
1 . 75 
2.19 
2.62 
3.06 
3.50 
3.94 
4.38 
9.00 
0,45 
0.90 
1 .35 
1 . 80 
2.25 
2.70 
3.15 
3.60 
4 . 05 
4.50 
• 
Section X - Page 21 SECTION XI 
EDGE GRINDING EDGE GRINDING 
OPERATION - A 1/4 H.P, motor is recommended to operate this machine if the 
motor is belted directly to the machine. The stone should run approximately 300 
revolutions per minute, and the top should turn away from the operator, as indicated 
by the arrow on the stone flange. 
BREAKING IN THE STONE - The stone should be run soaking wet for 24 hours before 
using, and always wet thereafter. Keep hone "A" (Figure 4) bearing slightly against 
the stone while edging. This will keep the face of the stone true and in fast 
cutting condition. 
LENS SHAPE - The shape of the lens is determined by means of pattern D (Figure 
1). Patterns are changed by merely slipping them on or off the holder G (Figure 
1 )* The ball spring chuck assures a snug fit, 
LENS SIZE - The size of the lens is controlled with micrometer wheel H. After 
the machine has been in use for some time, it will be found that the stone has worn 
slightly, and that the lens finishes oversize. To compensate for this, indicator 
".I" must be adjusted to reset the machine, edge any lens until no further reduction 
in size takes place. Remove the lens from the machine and measure it accurately. 
Without changing the position of micrometer wheel "H", loosen screws "I" with screw 
driver and turn dial "J" until it registers exactly the size of the lens just ground. 
Fasten the screw so that the dial is held securely in this position, and you will 
find that the machine is set accurately for size. 
GRINDING - Release lever "K" (Figure 2) in the lens centering device and allow 
the jaws to open to their full capacity. Remove pad holder "L" from the machine and 
place i t in the centering device with the rubber washer facing up, and the holes in 
the pad holder registering on the pins of the centering device. Then place the 
lenses on the rubber pad holder. The center of the axis directly over the inscribed 
line which connects the three holes of the pad holder. The center of the lens should 
rest directly over the center holes, thus locating both the major and minor axis. 
If more than one lens is to be edged at the same time, place the additional 
lenses on top of the first, using a washer between each lens, making certain that 
the axis and centers coincide. 
After the lenses have been correctly placed in the centering device, the upper 
jaw should be pressed firmly against them and Lever "K" locked into position. The 
centering device is now ready to be inserted between arbors "M" and "N", (Figure 3). 
Before inserting the lens in the machine and to prevent unusual breakage, 
especially on thin lenses, it is essential that the pressure, exerted against the 
lens arbors "M" and "N", and controlled by adjustable nut "S", be carefully reg- 
ulated. Turning counter clockwise decreases the tension. Make certain that just 
enough tension is applied to prevent the lens from slipping between the lens pads. 
Place the centering device in the machine between "M" and "N" so that the holes 
in the pad holder "L" will engage with the pins in the end of the right hand lens 
arbor "N”. This is more readily accomplished by turning clutch "P" (Figure 1) 
and bringing the pins in the lens arbor at a convenient position. 
When the lenses have been properly placed between the lens arbors, carefully 
release lever "0" (Figure 3), allowing the arbors to press gently against the lenses. 
Then unlock 1 ever "K" (Figure 2) and remove the centering device from the machine. 
To start grinding, engage clutch "P1 (Figure 1) and release trigger "O" (Figure 
Section XI - Page 1 EDGE GRINDING 
3), and let the grinding head come in contact with the stone very gently. It is 
advisable to relieve the pressure of the lens against the stone, with the hand, 
during the first revolution, after which the full pressure of the weight, on the 
left-hand side of the machine, may be applied. This pressure may be adjusted by 
releasing hand wheel "R" (Figure 3) and moving the weight in or out on the arm. 
QUICK GRINDING - If considerable stock is to be removed from some portion of 
the lens, clutch "P" should be disengaged and that part of the lens kept against the 
stone until it is roughed out approximately to the correct size, and the lens turned 
to any part that may require roughing out. 
This process will allow one to hasten the grinding operation considerably where 
the shape of the lens is very irregular. An extremely smooth finish can also be 
obtained if the lens is rapidly rotated counter-clockwise by hand with the clutch 
(disengaged) just before removing the lens from the stone* 
TRUING A CHIPPED STONE - If through accident, the grinding wheel is chipped, a 
truing diamond should be used to turn down the stone. The diamond should be placed 
in hole "U" (Figure 4), and secured by screw "Y". When used, the diamond point 
should be brought against the face of the stone with just enough pressure to remove 
a small portion only at each revolution. The stone is then given the proper amount 
of throw by means of handwheel "T", so that the diamond point covers the entire face 
as it travels back and forth. The stone must be running wet during this operation. 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE OPERATION AND CARE OF EDGING MACHINES 
These hand edgers are rigidly constructed and equipped with heavy, removeable 
bearings which, when worn, can be replaced at a small cost. With moderate care, 
these edgers are easily kept clean and in good running condition. 
Before operating, remove all dust and grit that may have accumulated in transit 
and apply plenty of oil to both oil cups on the stone arbor bearings. Make sure 
that these two bearings are always supplied with plenty of oil. The life of the 
machine depends considerably on the condition of these two bearings and if allowed 
to run without oil the stone will be out of true in very short time and it will be 
difficult to turn out first-class work. 
In moving the edger or setting up, do not take hold of the stone or pulley but 
grasp the trough or tub and make certain that the machine is level before it is 
screwed firmly in place. 
The pulleys should turn at approximately 300 revolutions per minute for the 16 
inch stone and 400 revolutions per minute for the 12 inch stone. The stone should 
run in the direction of the arrow stamped on it--that is, with the top running away 
from the operator. If possible, belt the machine from a transmission shaft under- 
nea th. 
Every edger is thoroughly tested at the factory and the stone is carefully 
trued and honed. During transit the water still left in the stone may have settled 
at the lowest part causing the stone to appear out of balance, until it is again 
completely soaked with water. It is essential, therefore, to apply water to the 
stone repeatedly, until it has absorbed all it possibly can. No grinding whatever 
should be attempted until the stone has run soaking wet for 24 hours. NEVER EDGE 
A LENS ON A DRY STONE. 
New stones have a tendency to become coarse and this should be borne in mind 
Section XI - Page 2 EDGE GRINDING 
when the machine is relatively new. A high grade stone is never at it*s best until 
it has been used for some time. As the quality of the work depends entirely upon 
the condition of the grinding wheel, it is important that it be given all the 
attention and care possible. 
When honing, use the device provided for that purpose. Set the hone supplied 
with the machine, lightly against the face of the stone# If out of true to any great 
extent, it will be necessary to turn the stone with a diamond. It should not be 
necessary, however, to use the diamond unless the grinding wheel has been damaged 
or chipped through accident. 
As the stone wears down, the hand rest should be brought forward to compensate 
for wear. This can be accomplished easily by loosening the bolt that holds the hand 
rest to the base or tub. After the hand rest has been moved nearer the stone, the 
bolt should be tightened firmly. 
Section XI - Page 3 EDGE GRINDING 
Section XI - Page 4 EDGE GRINDING 
Section XI - Page 5 EDGE GRINDING 
Section XI - Page 6 EDGE GRINDING 
Section XI - Page 7 EDGE GRINDING 
OIL DAILV 
WHEN SPINDLE IS IN BOTH 
OPEN AND 
POSITIONS 
REMOVE 
SCREWS AND OIL EVERY SIX MONTHS 
v 
OIL DAILV 
OiLthART TOR rv\®*o-A 
I34fc>& 
MSSS-C - 0 - HO 
Section XI - Page 8 EDGE GRINDING 
REPLACEMENT PARTS - M. 840 - A 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
1 
Base .... 
$30.00 
2 
Stone and Flange Complete 
29.00 
3 
Stone Arbor 
5.50 
4 
8' Flat Pulley for Stone Arbor . 
3.75 
5 
Yoke for Part 6 . 
1.00 
6 
Sprocket Hub for Stone Arbor . 
2.00 
7 
Yoke Screw for Part 5 
.05 
8 
Drain Pipe for Part 1 
.45 
9 
Screw for Part 32 
.05 
10 
Driving Sprocket for Part 6 
2.00 
11 
Bushing for Part I 
1 25 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
12 
Cap for Part 1 
$ .75 
14 
Screws for Part 12 
.05 
15 
Oilers for Part 12. 
.15 
16 
Key for Part 3 
.05 
17 
Wood Screw for Part 1 
.05 
18 
Screw for Part 33 
.05 
19 
Set Screw for Part 4 . 
.05 
20 
Water Tank Stem for Part 31 . 
.35 
21 
Screw for Part 27 
.05 
22 
Pin for Part 3 
.05 
23 
Stone Shifting Ring for Part 3 . 
1.30 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
24 
Thrust Washer for Part 3 . 
$ .45 
25 
Screw for Parts 6 and 10 
.05 
26 
Bushing for Part 31 
.50 
27 
Key for Part 6 
.35 
28 
Nut for Part 3 
.40 
29 
Oiler for Part 23 . 
. 10 
30 
Valve for Part 31. 
.60 
31 
Water Tank with Parts 26 & 30. 
4.50 
32 
Water Guard .... 
7.50 
33 
Chain Guard .... 
3.50 
34 
Dowel Pin for Part 1 . 
.05 
Section XI - Page 9 EDGE GRINDING 
FART DESCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
EACH 
35 
Rack Bracket for Pari 1 
$10.00 
36 
Sprocket Hub for Part 44 . 
1.30 
37 
Sprocket for Part 36 
2.50 
38 
Cap for Part 35 . 
. 65 
39 
Set Screw for Part 36 
.05 
40 
Screw for Parts 36 and 37 . 
.05 
41 
Key for Part 44 . 
. 05 
42 
Screw for Part 38 
.05 
43 
Ball Oiler for Part 35 , 
.05 
44 
Worm Shaft for Part 35 
2.50 
45 
Worm for Part 44 
2.00 
46 
Worm Wheel for Part 62 . 
3.00 
47 
Spiral Pinion for Part 62 
2.00 
48 
Screw for Part 35 
. 05 
49 
Taper Pin for Part 46 
.05 
50 
Bushing, Wi" long 
.85 
51 
Bushing 1J4* long 
.85 
52 
Bushing, 1}/% long 
. 75 
53 
Brass Plug for Part 35 
.05 
54 
Bushing, 3 long 
1.25 
55 
Bushing, long 
.75 
56 
Filler for Part 44 
.50 
PAR 
1' DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
57 
Collar for Part 62 
.$ .50 
58 
Pin for Part 57 ... 
.05 
59 
Pin for Part 45 ... 
.05 
60 
Paper Pin for Parts 47 and 81 . 
.05 
61 
Pivot for Parts 62 and 91 . 
.35 
62 
Rear Shaft for Part 35 
.30 
63 
Drive Shaft Sleeve for Nos. 62, 
91, 101 . . 
. 75 
64 
Screw for Holding Part 53 in 35 
.15 
65 
Rracket for Part 1 
12.50 
66 
(lib for Part 65 ... 
.50 
67 
Hone Holder for Part 65 . 
3.25 
68 
Bushing 2Vi" long for Part 65 . 
1.00 
69 
Bushing, \y% long for Part 65 . 
.75 
70 
Screw for Part 67 
20 
71 
Screw for Part 65 
. 10 
72 
Screw for Part 82 
.05 
73 
Screw for Part 65 
.05 
74 
Check Nut for Part 73 
.05 
75 
Screw for Part 67 ... 
.05 
76 
Dowel Pin for Part 65 
.05 
77 
Dowel Pin for Part 66 
.05 
PART DESCRIPTION 
NO. 
78 Taper Pin for Part 81 
PRICE 
EACH 
* .05 
79 
Cam Shaft for Part 100 
1.75 
80 
Key for Part 79 . 
05 
81 
Spiral Gear for Part 79 
1.75 
82 
Hone Bracket Cap for Part 65 . 
.65 
83 
Hone for Part 67 
1 .00 
84 
Hone Pad for Part 67 
. 15 
85 
Hand Wheel for Part 86 
1.35 
86 
Screw for Part 67 
.75 
87 
Pin for Part S.5 
.05 
88 
Screw for Part 89 
.05 
89 
Guard for Part 65 
.75 
90 
Clamp Plate for Part 67 
. 25 
91 
Center Shaft for Part 35 
. 75 
92 
Water Guard for Part 65 
.25 
93 
Gear Guard for Part 81 
,75 
94 
Screw for Part 93 
05 
95 
Oiler for Part 35 . 
.35 
96 
Oiler for Part 35 . 
. 10 
97 
Pin for Parts 61 and 91 
.05 
98 
Oiler for Part 35 . 
10 
100 
Ctun 
6 00 
Section XI - Page 10 EDGE GRINDING 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
101 
Front Shaft for Part 35 
$ .75 
102 
Bracket for Part 171 . 
7.50 
103 
Bushing lYi" for Part 102 
.75 
104 
Bushing for Part 102 
I .00 
105 
Screw for Part 102 
.05 
106 
Dowel Pin for Part 102 
05 
107 
Screw for Part 148 
.05 
108 
Tension Screw for Part 212 
.05 
109 
Key for Part 110 
.50 
110 
Spiral Gear(Bronze)on Part 101 
2.50 
111 
Screw for Part 115 
.05 
112 
Screw for Parts 113 and 114 
.05 
113 
Former Shoe .... 
1.25 
114 
Former Shoe Slide 
3.25 
115 
Cover 
1.00 
116 
Former Shoe Bracket . 
5.75 
117 
Dowel Pin for Part 116 
.05 
118 
Dowel Pin for Parts 123 and 131 
.05 
119 
Screw for Parts 123 and 131 
.05 
120 
Screw for Parts 116 and 123 
.05 
121 
Side Plate R.H. or Part 116 
.20 
122 
Side Plate L.H. Part 116 
.20 
123 
Guide Plate for Parts 116 and 131 
.50 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
KACH 
124 
Lever for Part 115 
$ .80 
125 
Pinion for Parts 139 in 116 
.85 
126 
Hand Wheel for Part 130 . 
.75 
127 
Indexing Plunger for Part 128 
. 10 
128 
Bushing for Part 124 . 
. 35 
129 
Washer for Part 130 
.15 
130 
Adjusting Screw for Part 131 
2.00 
131 
Slide for Part 102 
2.00 
132 
Clamping Screw for Part 141 
Ball Oiler for Part 116 
.50 
133 
.05 
134 
Pin for Parts 125 and 139 . 
.05 
135 
Spring for Part 127 
.05 
136 
Pin for Parts 130 and 126 . 
05 
137 
Knurled Nut on Part 127 . 
.15 
138 
Case for Part 102 
1.50 
139 
Shaft for Parts 124 and 125 
.05 
140 
Screws for Part 138 
.05 
141 
Micrometer Index Dial 
1.00 
142 
Indexing Gear in Part 138 
I 50 
145 
Bracket for Oscillator Lever on 
Part 1 
4.00 
146 
Gib for Part 145 . 
.50 
147 
Yoke for Parts 153 and 160 
5.50 
PART DESCRIPTION 
NO. 
148 Yoke Plate for Part 147 
PRICE 
EACH 
1 .35 
149 
Gib screw for Part 145 
05 
150 
Check Nut for Part 149 
.05 
151 
Hand Wheel for Part 156 . 
1 25 
152 
Washer for Part 147 . 
,25 
153 
Slide for Part 147 
2.00 
154 
Cam Roll for Part 159 
1 00 
155 
Screw for Part 147 
.05 
156 
Adjusting Screw for Part 147 
1.00 
157 
Lock Nut for Part 158 
.05 
158 
Pivot Screw for Part 160 
. 15 
159 
Cam Roll Stud for Part 160 
1.00 
160 
Stone Shifting Lever . 
5 00 
161 
Pin for Part 151 
.05 
162 
Repair Link for Part 163 . 
.30 
163 
Driving Chain 
2.50 
164 
Screw for Attaching 145 to Base 
.05 
165 
Dowels for Attaching 145 to Base 
.05 
166 
Oiler for Part 168 
. 10 
167 
Screw for Part 168 
.05 
168 
Guard over Part 101 . 
2.00 
169 
Washer for. Part 159 . 
.20 
170 
Washer for Part 156 . 
.15 
Section XI - Page 11 EDGE GRINDING 
PART D INSCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
KACH 
171 
Base for Swinging Head 
$ 7.50 
172 
Swinging Head for Part 171 
20 00 
173 
Oiler for Part 171 
.10 
174 
Lens Clamping Lever 
1.10 
175 
Screw for Bushings in Pari 171 . 
.05 
176 
Worm Gear Guard 
. 75 
177 
Bushing 5%" for Part 172 
2 50 
178 
Bushing 3%" for Part 172 
2.00 
179 
Cap for Part 172 
.75 
180 
Cap for Part 172 
1 00 
181 
Screw for Part 172 
. 25 
182 
Oiler for Part 172 
. 10 
183 
Shaft for Parts 171 and 172 
1 75 
184 
Cap Screw for Parts 179 and 180 
.05 
185 
Segment for Part 190 
2.25 
186 
Spiral Pinion for Part 183 . 
2 00 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
KACII 
187 
Bushing \ 'Y%” for Part 201 
$ .85 
188 
Bushing I for Pari 201 
1 00 
*I88A New Style, Bushing lor Part 
261 
1.00 
*I88H Parking Nut for Part I88A 
. 50 
189 
Bushing Wz for Part 197 
1.00 
190 
Rack for Part 172 
2.00 
191 
Spiral Pinion for Part 185 . 
2 00 
192 
Spring Pin for Part 185 
.10 
198 
Spiral Clutch Pinion 
1.00 
191 
Bushing for Part 195 . 
.85 
195 
Thrust Collar for Pari 185. 
. 50 
196 
Pin for Part 195 . 
. 05 
197 
Left Hand Lena Arbor See also 
Part 258 
5 00 
198 
Kxtension Sleeve for Part 197 . 
1 75 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO. 
EACH 
199 
Plug for Pari 198 
$ .25 
200 
Stop for Part 197 
. 05 
201 
Right Hand Let Arbor See 
also Part 26! 
.8 50 
202 
Latch for Part 208 
. 75 
20.? 
Holder for Part 172 
.50 
201 
Pin for Parts 202 and 208 . 
.05 
205 
Stud for Part 174 
1.50 
206 
Keys for Part 205 
.05 
207 
Nut for Part 205 
. 05 
208 
Key for Parts 201 and 219. 
. 05 
209 
Screw for Part 176 
05 
210 
Screw and Washer for Paris 171 
Of 
*Nnt lUirntraN 
Section XI - Page 12 EDGE GRINDING 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
EACH 
211 
Knurled head for Part 212. 
. $ 1,50 
212 
Driving Clutch 
1.50 
213 
Collar for Part 183 
.50 
214 
Gear for Part 197 . 
3 50 
215 
Handle for Part 216 
.25 
216 
Pin for Parts 215 and 211 . 
10 
217 
Drive Pin for Part 213 
.05 
218 
Screw for Parts 211 
.05 
219 
Gear for Part 201 
3.50 
220 
Tension Spring in Pan 172 
. 35 
221 
Nut lor Part 222 
1 00 
222 
Tension Spring Screw 
.50 
223 
Adjusting Screw for Part 171 
20 
224 
Check Nut for Part 223 
05 
225 
Rod for Parts 251 in 172 
30 
PART DESCRIPTION 
NO. 
PRICE 
EACH 
226 
Friction Plug for Pari 212 
$ . 05 
227 
Spring for Parts 226 in 212 
10 
228 
Pin for Parts 225 
. 05 
229 
Screw for Part 230 
.05 
230 
Cover for Part 172 
.30 
231 
Pail Holder for Part 197 
.65 
232 
Pad Holder for Part 201 with 
Washer Part 233 
.60 
234 
Rubber Pad for Pari 231 per 
10 ... . 
30 
235 
Thrust Rearing for Part 197 
1 25 
236 
Thrust Rearing for Part 201 
I 50 
237 
Cover for Pari 236 
. 50 
238 
Former Holder for Pari 201 
2.00 
239 
Collar for Part 238 
1 25 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO 
EACH 
210 
Hound Pattern . f 
241 
R6 Pattern J 
See 
212 
H7 Pattern . . <j 
Htt Pat tern . . . | 
machinery 
243 
price 
list 
2U 
HO Pattern 1^ 
245 
Washer for Part 214 
$ .50 
216 
Screw for Part 2 15 
05 
217 
Screw for Parts 50 and 2515 
05 
2t» 
Washer for Parts 2.‘5H . 
25 
240 
Thumb Nut for Part 201 
25 
250 
(luard for Part 21 I 
2 00 
251 
Weight for Part 225 
1 00 
252 
Hand Wheel for Part 251 
50 
25.5 
Guard for Part 210 
1 00 
Section XI - Page 13 EDGE GRINDING 
The parts shown on this page 
are for the M8U0A Edger 
only. Those shown on the 
preceding pages are also 
used on the M8U0 Edger. 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICK 
NO. 
EACH 
255 
V-Belt Pulley 
. $ 4.50 
256 
No. 520 Gits Oiler 
.10 
257 
Thrust Washer 
See No. 235 
258 
Left Hand Lens Arbor See 
also 
part 197 . 
1 75 
259 
Left Hand Pad Holder 
1.00 
260 
Pad Used on M8 10 
06 
261 
Right Hand Lons Arbor 
See 
also part 201 . 
I . 75 
262 
Right Hand Holder 
1.00 
263 
Pad (Vellumoid) . 
. 06 
264 
Cellar 
1.00 
265 
1/16*’ Dia. Piu Vs' l’g. 
.05 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO 
EACH 
266 
No. 4 Woodruff Key . 
$ .05 
267 
Former Holder 
2.50 
268 
Former Shoe 
. . 75 
26‘» 
Former Shoe Bracket . 
1.75 
270-1 
No. 8-32PxJii" !>. II.S.S. 
& 
Lock Nut . 
. 10 
272 
No. 4-36P x V I’g. F.L.S. 
. 10 
27.'5 
.063 Dia. Pin %" I’g. . 
.05 
271 
No. 10-24P x %" I’g. II.S.S. 
. 05 
275 
No. 10-25P x %" I’r. F.II.S. 
05 
276 
Vs Dia. Pin 1 Ys l'g. . 
05 
277 
Washer 
. 05 
278 
Lock Washer 
.05 
PART DESCRIPTION 
PRICE 
NO 
EACH 
279 
14“ x Jie" Pin 
$ .05 
280 
M'-20P x M' H.S.S. . 
.05 
281 
Packing Nut 
.50 
282 
Pad 
.05 
283 
Spanner Wrench . 
.50 
284 
Guard 
285 
H* Dia. Plug %“ i’g. . . 
10 
286 
J*'-20P x H" I’g. F.L.S. . 
05 
287 
No. 10-24P F.L.S. 
05 
288 
Diamond Holder . 
.75 
289 
Brass Screw .... 
.05 
290 
No. 10-24P F.L.S. 
.05 
291 
Flange 
6 00 
Section XI - Page 14 EDGE GRINDING 
DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATING THE SHURON 66-A EDGER 
RIMLESS EDGE GRINDING MACHINE - All this painstaking performance--developed 
skill and hard work--of grinding the edges of lenses by hand brought forth the 
"automatic edging machine" (rimless)* The earliest of these was a simple contrivance 
to clamp the lens between two spindles and to rotate it against the face of a 
grindstone* There was more to it than just that* There was the matter of size* of 
shape, and of oscillation, to produce a machine-ground lens equal in accuracy and 
beauty of workmanship to a band-ground lens* Oscillation is necessary to prevent 
the lens from grinding in the same path and forming grooves in the face of the 
gri ndstone* 
Gears, belts, chains and cams were employed to produce the mechanical movements 
necessary to duplicate the hand job* None of these were any too good, because of 
wear, back-lash, and jumpy operation* These faults resulted in chipped lenses, 
"bumpy" shapes, "off-axis" grinding, and "wavy" edges* 
The machine has a pendant carriage so delicately balanced that the thinnest 
lens may be ground without chipping* Incidentally, the use of weight in connection 
with the pendant carriage to regulate the pressure of the lenses against the stone 
enables the operator to estimate the pressure and instantly adjust it to a nicety 
and insure a uniform pressure at all times* 
The carriage of the '66" Grinder oscillates instead of the stone. It is mounted 
on the same table slide with the truer so that the surface of the stone is always 
true with relation to the lenses in the machine* The slide is completely enclosed 
and submerged in oil, the oil being covered to keep out dirt* 
All bearings are completely protected from ground glass, grit and refuse water, 
and all gears are entirely enclosed and nearly all run in an oil bath* These two 
features insure perfect adjustment at all times and a longer life for the machine* 
Ihe oscillation is uniform, smooth and positive, and is instantly adjustable 
in either direction while the machine is in operation* Thus the whole surface of 
the stone is utilized and the wear distributed equally whether one or six lenses 
are being ground. 
The truing device i s on the front of the machine where it is readily accessible. 
When truing with a diamond, the diamond may be automatically passed clear out of the 
grinding vtheel on both edges* 
Section XI - Page 15 EDGE GRINDING 
The "66" Grinder is equipped with a very quick and accurate lens centering and 
clamping device and once in the machine the lenses are securely and positively held 
by direct spring pressure* Clamping and unclamping is done instantly with a lever* 
As the carriage is pendant, 
the top of the grinding wheel moves 
toward instead of away from the 
operator, throwing the refuse water 
down into the trough* The trough 
may be easily cleaned by means of 
an opening in front* 
The "66" Grinder is quickly 
adjusted to grind any sire lens, 
and formers of any shape are easily 
attached* 
The lens clamp lever 2172 
(see Figure 3) operates a positive 
cam arm which in turn pushes against 
a spring under compression--thus 
the operation is instantaneous and 
positive, yet the lenses are not 
held in a clamp so rigid as to 
endanger breakage. 
The gears and spindles in the 
carriage are packed in grease* 
Enough of this should be added 
through the grease fittings No* 
1854 on top of carriage, so that a 
little will keep working out on the 
spindle bearings behind the pad 
holders* This will insure that no 
grit will be working in at these 
points* 
The bearings of the slide 
table are submerged in machine oil* 
This is supplied through the cup 
No* 2260 at right front of slide 
and the oil level should be about one-half way up in the cup* The slide is operated 
by a cylinder and piston* Oil is pumped into first one end of this cylinder and 
then the other by a rotary pump having a reversing valve* This valve is reversed 
by tipping pin No* 1485, in front of slide base, one way or the other* The position 
and amount of oscillation of slide table can be controlled by trip screws No* 143 
while the machine is either running or idle* 
The hone 2313 on the top of the stone is not for the purpose of truing the 
stone but simply to keep the stone in good cutting condition. The screw holding 
this hone should be tightened down just enough to hold it steady. 
The hone 2240 on carriage slide is for truing the stone and should be used at 
the first indication of a facet or chatter on the edge of the lens ground as this 
condition is caused by the stone becoming out of true* It will be found that, due 
to the upper hone keeping the stone surface in good cutting condition, it will stay 
FIGURE 1 
Section XI - Page 16 EDGE GRINDING 
true much longer than when this upper hone is not used* Keeping hone No* 2240 
against the stone lightly at all times is advised* At any rate, keep the stone 
true* 
FIGURE 2. No. 2355 Centering Attachment for the 
Shuron No. 66-A Rx Rimless Edge Grinder* 
To place a lens in the machine when using Centering attachment (known as 
No* 2355), Figure 2, pick it up in such a way that the two pads AA can be closed 
toward each other, thus opening up the clamping jaws* Place the Head Pad holder 
B on the small locating pins* There are two of these Pad Holders furnished with 
the machine, a thick one. No. 2227, for one or two lenses, and a thin one. No* 2356, 
to be used if more than two lenses are to be edged at once* Locate the lens or 
lenses in the proper position on the Pad Holder* A small hole in the center of the 
Pad Holder enables the operator to center the lens accurately, while two small holes 
in the jaws of the attachment serve as guides for correct axis position* Releasing 
the pressure on pads AA allows the jaws to clamp the lens, after which it may be 
rechecked to be sure that it is correctly placed in the attachment* Peephole bar 
C may be pushed to one side if the operator does not care to see it, but for accurate 
centering, it should be used, as it ensures the lens being viewed from the true 
vertical point over the center of the lens* If the lens is placed while it is 
viewed at an angle, it will cause the lens to be decentered* (This fact is true of 
all centering attachments, but all of them do not have means whereby the correct 
position can be known)* After the lens has been clamped and checked for correct 
positioning, swing bar C to one side aid place lens in machine by slipping the Pad 
Holder B over its locating pins on the Head Spindle of the machine* Clamp the lens 
in machine by pushing lever No* 2172 to the left* Then by again applying pressure 
to pads AA, the centering attachment may be removed* To start the lens revolving, 
raise operating lever No* 666 to the upright position* 
To obtain the sire of lens desired to be ground, turn the index wheel 1320 
until the graduation on the index indicating desired eye size is in line with the 
zero mark on machine* Turning the wheel to the right decreases and to the’left 
increases the size of lens ground* 
The lens is held against the stone by means of weight No* 2304* Pressure may 
be increased by sliding the weight No* 2304 forward on rod Noo 2306* For grinding 
a single lens only a slight pressure is needed* Excessive pressure tends to roughen 
Section XI - Page 17 EDGE GRINDING 
stone and hence to chip lens» The lens should be allowed to grind until former 651 
rubs on the contact plate throughout one or two complete revolutions* 
FIGURE 3. The Shuron No. 66-A 'Rimless Edge Grinder* 
If it should be found that the length of lens ground does not correspond to 
the reading on the index dial 1320, adjust dial as follows: 
Turn screw No. 817 counter-clock-wise about one turn, being careful not to let 
wheel No. 1320 turn* Now hold wheel No. 1320 steady while the graduation, corres- 
ponding to the size that lens measured, corresponds with the zero line on machine, 
then tighten screw No. 817 by turning it clock-wise* This will bind the graduated 
ring to the knurled one. making them move as one* 
If it is desired to move the machine a little closer to the stone because of 
wear, with hone No. 2240 against stone, loosen the clamp screws No. 105 up a little 
and turn back the truer slide., letting the whole unit slide down the desired amount* 
Then again tighten screws No. 105. After an adjustment of this kind, it will be 
necessary to readjust index dial. 
If it is found that the machine is grinding the lens a little off axis, this 
can be corrected by tipping the contact-plate (2243) a little in the direction 
opposite to that in which the axis is off* The steel clip on the face of this plate 
is for convenience in taking care of wear without disturbing the axis adjustment* 
Section XI - Page 18 EDGE GRINDING 
DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATING THE SHURON 77-A EDGER 
When you receive your new 77-A Edger unpack it carefully and check the follow- 
ing accessories: 
2 Wrenches 
1 Lens clamp 
2 Screwdrivers 
6 Patterns 
1 Oi1 can 
1 Thick regular pad holder 
1 Thin regular pad holder 
1 Small Round Regular pad holder 
10 Rubber pads 
10 Rubber washers, thick 
The machine itself is 13" wide, 17" deep and 18" high and weighs 90 pounds*, 
With motor plate it is 23 inches deep and with motor added will wei gh about 120 
pounds according to motor construction*, 
The edger may be placed on any bench and operated by a motor placed on a 
special adjustable plate at the rear of the edger or it may be belted down through 
the bench to a motor under the bench. 
The motor should be of 1/4 horse power and 1140 revolutions per minute., The 
motor pulley should be 3 1/8" in diameter and made for 7/16 Vee leather belt. 
Correct stone speed is 530 revolutions per minute. 
If your own motor is installed or this machine is connected to a line shaft, 
these instructions should be followed: 
To check speed of stone count revolutions of shaft Q. Stone turns 12 times 
as fast as this shaft. This shaft should turn 44 times per minute which will give 
a stone speed of 530 revolutions per minute. 
The rotation of the stone is forward, the top of the stone turning toward the 
front of the machine. 
Before attempting to grind lenses be sure that the sponge in the round remov- 
able sponge holder, at the rear of the stone, is in position. There should also be 
a sponge in the clip over the truer stick. Provide water in receptacle on top of 
machine and connect tell-tale light connection with 110-volt current. 
The machine has been well oiled and run in on the test line. The main stone 
bearings will need oil once every two weeks. The head will need oil once a month 
and the gear box at the right end of the stone arbor will need oil once every two 
weeks. Two or three drops of good machine oil in each cup is all that is necessary 
at one oiling. Place a drop of oil occasionally in oil hole on truer feed wheel. 
Lenses have been ground on this stone for three days, so it is now trued and 
ready to go to work. 
To check for correct position of sizing dial, set at 40 mm. This should bring 
the small white pin in the dial flush with the top of the feed screw. To set size, 
turn dial to one size smaller than required and then turn dial clockwise to size 
desi red. 
The regular drop-shape pad holder is 37mm, long and should not be used for 
lenses under 38 mm, A small round pad is supplied for the small size grinding, and 
a regular drop-shape thin pad for thick lens grinding or for pairs of lenses, both 
of these pads being standard equipment with the 77-A, 
Section XI - Page 19 EDGE GRINDING 
FIGURE 4. 
Att Lens clamping wheelu 
B. Rotation engaging wheels 
C. Lens positioning pointer. 
D. Sizer dial. 
E. Lens pad holders. 
F. Post to tip-up head spindle 
G. Pressure weight. 
H. Lens former*. 
I*. Truer feed wheel» 
J. Truer lever*. 
K. Water dip control. 
L. Peep sight. 
M. Carriage raising lever. 
N. Carriage lever latch. 
O. Stone adjusting nut for sizing lens. 
P. Lens clamp to pad holder. 
Section XI - Page 20 EDGE GRINDING 
VO 
K 
3 
E 
LO 
K 
8 
E 
Section XI - Page 21 EDGE GRINDING 
TO INSERT A LENS FOR GRINDING 
Place former on machine at point H (Figure 6)(if drop-shape, see that bottom of 
former is on the same side as bottom of drop shape pad holder). Set sizer dial (D) 
for size required. Move weight (G) back to rear of slide. 
Move lever (M) back until latch (N) catches, to hold carriage up away from the 
grinding position. 
Turn hand wheel (A) to left with right hand as far as it will go—which unlocks 
the head spindle--and hold in this position. With left hand swing post (F)(Figure 
6) to left which will tip up the head spindle to its vertical position. 
A perfect view of the new protractor pad holder is presented. Pull out hand 
wheel (B) to the extreme right and turn. This will revolve the pad so that lines 
may be placed in 180° meridian. Be sure that the drop-side of the pad protractor 
coincides with the drop on your pattern if you are using a drop shape. 
Place lens on pad with convex side dovn, using the rigfit hand. With the lens 
clamp (P) held in the left hand next to the carriage and parallel to the 180° lines 
on the pad protractor, place the two top fingers of the clamp holder over the lens 
from the left, and slide the bottom of the clamp on to the square milled space on 
the under side of the pad holder. Release pressure on lens clamp and lens will be 
held on to the pad holder by the clamp. 
The lens should now be moved so that the cutting line will fall on the white 
space located between the two black lines on the pad holder, and so that the center 
mark will fall in the center of the white square located in the middle of the pad. 
By moving the lens slightly any possible error in position of axis and center 
can be easily checked. 
With right hand turn lens clamping wheel (A) about a quarter turn to left to 
unlock the head spindle and with left hand on post (F) tip the head spindle, with 
its lens and lens clamp, down to the right as far as it will go, which will bring 
the head spindle in line with the tail spindle and pad. Now turn the lens clamping 
wheel to the right, which will bring the tail spindle and lens pad up to the lens. 
Set clamping pressure with lens clamping wheel and REMOVE THE LENS CLAMP FROM 
THE LENS AND MACHINE. Failure to remove lens clamp will cause damage for it is 
impossible to rotate the lens clamp on the lens spindle. 
With right hand push wheel B in toward the carriage as far as it will go. This 
will engage the gears that turn the spindle for lens grinding. DO NOT OPERATE 
UNLESS FULLY engaged. The lens will now be turning at the rate of 2 1/2 revolutions 
per minute. 
With left hand on lever (M) release latch (N) and let carriage down carefully, 
until the lens meets the stone. 
Watch the travel of the lens toward the edge of the stone and as the lens 
approaches the stone edge set it back, if necessary, with positioning pointer (C). 
Chce the position has been set it will not be necessary to touch the positioning 
pointer again until you have changed to a different curvature of lens, or to a pair 
of lenses. 
Move weight (G) forward slightly on the slide to increase grinding pressure. 
Use this weight carefully for it increases the pressure very fast. 
Be sure of ample water supply and check sponges. Now as the lens nears 
Section XI - Page 22 EDGE GRINDING 
completion it will be noted that the tell-tale light will begin to light. A steady 
light through one revolution of the lens shows a finished job down to the size that 
was set on the sizing dial. Move the weight (G) to the forward extremity for the 
last revolution of the lens. 
To remove lens from machine first slide weight back to rear and push back on 
carriage lever (M) until latch (N) engages and holds carriage out of grinding 
position. Pull out hand wheel (B) to stop spindle revolving. With left hand take 
hold of lens and with right hand turn lens clamping wheel (B) to the left which 
will bring back tail spindle and pad so lens may be removed. 
To check the accuracy of size in grinding, attach the lens clamp to the lens 
and pad holder AFTER REVOLVING OF SPINDLE HAS BEEN STOPPED. Then release pressure 
on hand clamping wheel (A) and tip the head spindle to a vertical position. The 
lens may now be viewed and measured and, if necessary, be replaced in grinding 
exactly as it was before. 
To true the stone hold lever (J) with left hand and turn hand wheel (I) to the 
right until the carborundum stick engages the stone. Now oscillate the lever (J) 
back and forth, which will give a new flat surface on the stone (be sure not to run 
carborundum stick off the edge of the stone.) When truing is completed, be sure to 
back off on wheel (I) to disengage carborundum stick from stone. 
To change axis turn the brass screw on the back of the contact plate with a 
screwdriver. Turning left will shift lens axis to right. Turning right will shift 
lens axis to left. 
If the lens tends to jump ahead on odd shape lens corners when in contact with 
the stone, tighten down slightly on the screw on top of post (F). This will put a 
brake on the head spindle which may become necessary because the ball bearing 
construction in the head turns very freely. 
If the size of the lens is small, turn screw (0) to left, which will lower the 
stone carriage assembly, thus making the lens larger. If the lens is large, turn 
the screw to the right. 
To put more tension on clamping wheel (A) simply turn down slightly the two 
screws on the plate directly under the clamping wheel* 
The water container on top of the machine is constructed with a drip control 
(K)(Figure 5) which must be removed when water is piped from city supply. The drip 
from the supply pipe will then go through the container and on to the stone through 
the movable spout. 
Do not attempt to pipe water direct to the stone as the spout on the water 
container is designed to follow the lens oscillation, which decreases the tendency 
toward water marks. 
To replace or adjust carborundum stick shut off power first, then tip up the 
heado The truing lever can now be rotated to bring the stick upside down, which 
will expose its clamping screws in an accessible position for adjustment. 
After all, no grindstone--or machine--is better than the condition of its work- 
ing face. "Truing" and "honing" are essential. It is true that large "stones" will 
"last" longer. They will require reconditioning less often. But the larger the 
"stone", the longer "time" will be consumed in bringing it bade to proper working 
Section XI - Page 23 EDGE GRINDING 
condition* Because workmen are so notoriously prone to "put off until tomorrow", 
die to press of other work, the apparently non-productive job of truing grindstones, 
they are sadly neglected. In the meantime, the surface becomes "glazed", ridges 
appear at the edges, and productive efficiency is progressively lowered. 
Actually no "machine" grindstone should be used as a "handstone". No hand 
grinding should be done on it! Such work tends to form "grooves" and low places on 
the "face". For the benefit of better results in "machine" grinding use an exclu- 
sive handstone for "hand work" and for "touching off" the corners of lenses ground 
in edging machines. This job should be done neatly. There is nothing more indica- 
tive of poor workmanship than a "rimless" edge that has had the "comers" edged off 
in a "sloppy fashion". 
SPARE PARTS LIST FOR "SHURON 77-A EDGING MACHINE 
Section XI - Page 24 EDGE GRINDING 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3895 
Gear for Worm No. 3894 
(13) 
3896 
Vertical Shaft—Lower 
3897 
Gear on Vertical Shaft 
(47) 
3898 
Worm for Gear No. 3897 
3899 
Shaft for Worm No. 3898 
3900 
Bearing for Shaft No. 
3899 
3901 
Screw to Adjust Stone 
Yoke 
3902 
Screw Head (3901) 
3903 
Screw Nut Stud 
3904 
Screw Cover Rubber Tube 
3905 
Fiber Washer for Stone 
Arbor 
3911 
Leather Friction Pad for 
No. 3903 
3923 
Lamp Bulb 
3924 
Lamp Socket Adjustment 
3925 
Lamp Socket Assembly 
(3924-3927) 
3926 
Lamp Socket Casing 
3927 
Lamp Socket Post (V«" 
Nipple) 
3928 
Cap for Casing 3926 
3930 
Connection for Lead-in 
Wire 
3931 
Yh" Bushing for Wire 
4018 
Oilite Bushing for Shaft 
(3896) 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
5 
Screw 10-30 x ,V' Hdls. 
13 
Screw *,4-30 x %" Hdls. 
47 
Screw 14-30 x \±" Hdl.s. 
53 
Screw 10-30 x Hdls. 
63 
Screw 5-40 x 1 %" Fil. 
66 
Screw V4-20 x 11/4" Hex. 
114 
Screw 14-20 x 1/2" Set 
116 
Screw J4-20 x :/" Csk. 
121 
Screw 10-30 x 14" Hdls. 
435 
Screw 10-30 
1857 
Zerk Fitting 4.-32 Ell. 
2322 
Screw 4-30 x Hdls. 
3848 
Switch for Pilot Light 
3849 
Nut 5-40 to Clamp Switch 
3879 
Pulley for Stone (13) 
3880 
Stone Arbor Only 
3881 
Stone Center 
3882 
Stone Clamp Ring 
3883 
Bearing for Stone—Right 
3884 
Bearing for Stone—Left 
3885 
Felt for Stone Bearing 
3886 
Felt Packing Ring 
3887 
Oil Cup. Hinged ,V' 
3890 
Yoke for Stone (4/66- 
2/114-116-121-3892-3893 
3900-4018) 
3892 
Cap for Bearing—Right 
(2322) 
3893 
Cap for Bearing—Left 
3894 
Worm on Stone Arbor 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
76 
Nut 10-30 
681 
Pin %" x %" 
3917 
Hood—Right Side (681) 
3918 
Hood—Left (681) 
3919 
Hood Push Stud 
3921 
Hood Clamp Nut 
Section XI - Page 25 EDGE GRINDING 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
8 
Screw x 1%" Set 
18 
Screw 10-30 x %" Fil. 
31 
Screw Vi"-20 x Fil. 
47 
Screw %"-30 x V4" Hdls. 
76 
Nut 10-30 
97 
Screw tV'-18 x V2" Set 
112 
Screw tV'-IS x %" Hex. 
121 
Screw 10-30 x Hdls. 
161 
Wrench 14 " x fa” 
830 
Screw 10-30 x -ft" Fil. to Clamp 
Carborundum Stick 
954 
Plate to Clamp Carborundum Stick 
2240 
Carborundum Stick for Truer 
3554 
Hex. Wrench for Screw No. 3778 
3751 
Friction Leather fa” 
3850 
Cleat for Switch Wire (18) 
3857 
Cone Bearing, Lower (8) 
3867 
Main Frame, Upper (47-3/97) 
3868 
Truer Bearing Bushing 
3869 
Truer Star Wheel (121) 
3870 
Truer Stem 
3871 
Truer Lever (121) 
3872 
Truer Lever Retaining Screw 
3875 
Sponge Tube—Outer 
3876 
Sponge Tube—Inner (3877) 
3891 
Stud Pivot for Stone 
3919 
Hood Push Stud 
3920 
Hood Pull Stud 
4005 
Sponge, Rear 
4006 
Sponge, Truer 
4007 
Screw Driver fa” 
Section XI - Page 26 EDGE GRINDING 
3790 
Carriage Center (2/5-47-67- 
144-934-3825) 
3791 
Bolt to Lock Tip-up End 
3792 
Spring for Lock Bolt 
3794 
Stud for Bell Crank 
3795 
Stud for Clamp Fork 
3797 
Tail Spindle 
3798 
Pad Holder for Tail Spindle 
(976) 
3799 
Front Bearing for Tail Spindle 
3800 
Packing for Tail Spindle 
3801 
Packing Nut for Tail Spindle 
3802 
Thrust Cone 
3803 
Thrust Cup Tail Spindle 
(1253) 
3804 
Gear on Tail Spindle (47) 
3805 
Gear to Drive Tail Spindle 
(3819) 
3806 
Gear Intermediate for Tail 
Spindle 
3807 
Stud for Intermediate Gear 
3808 
Clutch Star Wheel (3810) 
3809 
Clutch Pin 
3810 
Screw to Retain Clutch Wheel 
3812 
Lens Clamp Eccentric (672- 
681-2564) 
3813 
Lens Clamp Star Wheel 
3815 
Hub for Clamp Fork (145- 
2/2948-3811) 
3817 
Carriage End Cover (3807- 
3840) 
3821 
Gear, Mitre, on Back Shaft 
(3823) 
3822 
Gear, Mitre, on Vertical Shaft 
(3823) 
3824 
Ball Bearing for Mitre Gear 
3825 
Stop Screw for Bearing No. 
3824 
3826 
Universal Joint Center (2/5) 
3827 
Universal Joint Complete 
(2/ 2293-3757-3758-3826) 
3829 
Tee Head for Shaft (3828- 
1078) 
3831 
Friction Clip for Eccentric 
No. 3812 (3816) 
3832 
Eye Piece 
3840 
Ball Bearing Cup for Back 
Shaft (3818) 
3847 
Key Pin for No. 3822, .066" x 
3866 
ft” 
Bell Crank for Bolt No. 3791 
Mach. (3793) 
3873 
Packing for Clutch Wheel 
No. 3808 
3874 
Packing Clip (3816) 
3936 
Lens Clamp Comp. (3934- 
3935-3937-3938) 
4004 
Spacer Pad Holder 
4019 
Bearing, Lower for Eccentric 
(3812) 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3769 
Head Pad Holder Rd. (976) 
3770 
Head Pad Holder Short (976) 
3774 
Handle for Tip-up 
3775 
Friction Adjusting Screw 
3776 
Friction Plug 
3777 
Friction Drum (47) 
3779 
Stud for Tip-up Stop 
3780 
Cross Shaft for Head Spindle 
3781 
Bearing for Cross Shaft 
3782 
Gear, Bevel for Cross Shaft 
(3762-3771-3780) 
3783 
Gear, Spiral for Cross Shaft 
3784 
Gear, Spiral for Back Shaft 
(13) 
3785 
Back Shaft (2838-3805) 
3786 
Bearing for Left End Back 
Shaft 
3789 
Cover for Tip-up Slot (3787) 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
2888 
Pin V»" x 13 16" 
8044 
Fiber Washer M>" x 1 Vii" 
3492 
Screw 5-40 x 9 32" Fil. 
3546 
Spring to Retain Former 
3757 
Universal Joint, Upper 
3758 
Universal Joint, Lower 
3759 
Block to Retain Former Spring 
3760 
Housing for Head Spindle 
(5-47-121) 
3761 
Head Spindle (3762) 
3762 
Key Pin for Head Pad Holder 
3763 
Front Bearing Head Spindle 
3764 
Bushing for Bearing No. 3763 
3765 
Rear Bearing for Head Spindle 
3766 
Gear for Head Spnd. (47-3772) 
3767 
Collar for Former Pins 
(2/2448) 
3768 
Head Pad Holder Reg. (976) 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
2 
Screw 10-30 x </«" Fil. 
5 
Screw 10-30 x ,V' Hdls. 
13 
Screw 1/4-30 x V/i" Set 
44 
Screw V4-30 x ]-" Hdls. 
47 
Screw 1/4-30 x 1/4" Hdls. 
67 
Screw 10-30 x Hdls. 
121 
Screw v',."-18 x %" Hex. 
144 
Screw 14-30 x A" Hdls. 
145 
Screw 14-30 x %" Set 
148 
Screw 5-40 x A" Fil. 
233 
Pin A" x i/>" 
406 
Screw l4"-30 x %" Fil. 
525 
Oil Hole Cover A"-30 
681 
Pin i/«" x %" 
934 
Pin 1/4" x 1 A" 
1853 
Alemite Oiler V4"-32 
2293 
Pin A” x 1A" 
2564 
Pin A" x 3/4" 
Section XI - Page 27 EDGE GRINDING 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
41 
Screw 10-30 x A" Fil. 
47 
Screw %"-30 x 14" Hdls. 
76 
Nut 10-30 
77 
Nut 14 "-30 
132 
Screw i4"-20 Thumb 
2304 
Weight Lens Pressure (132) 
2636 
Drip Pipe %" x 12" 
3576 
Screw 1/4"-20 x Hollow 
3778 
Screw 14"-20 x 14" Hollow 
3833 
Lever to Lift Carriage (47) 
3834 
Latch to Lift Carriage 
3835 
Link to Weight Lever 
3836 
Weight Lever (3778) 
3837 
Weight Lever Stud 
3838 
Ball Bearing for Weight Bracket No. LS-5 
3839 
Weight Bracket (3778) 
3878 
Weight Slide Rod (77) 
3912 
Hinge Pin for Side Door 
3913 
Main Base (3576-3912-3914) 
3914 
Side Door 
3915 
Side Door Latch 
3916 
Side Door Knob 
4003 
Shield Washer for No. 3838 
Section XI - Page 28 EDGE GRINDING 
4008 
Motor Base Only 
4009 
Anchor for Motor Base 
(2/3697) 
4010 
Slide Rod 
4011 
Clamp Nut for Rubber 
4012 
Adjusting Thumb Nut 
4013 
Rubber Foot Pad 
4017 
Belt, Vee, for Motor 
62 
Screw i4"-20 x % Hex. 
92 
Washer 14" 
141 
Screw 7-40 x %" Fil. 
519 
Cotter Pin 3/32" for No. 
4010 
965 
Oil Can 
976 
Rubber Pad—Thick 
3697 
Stud for Motor Base 
Anchor 
Section XI - Page 29 EDGE GRINDING 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
38 
Screw 7-40 x Yb” Hd!s. 
78 
Nut i/4"-20 
98 
Screw A"-18x%" Hollow 
122 
Screw 10-30 x %" Hdls. 
129 
Screw 5-40 x Vfc" Fil. 
154 
Nut Vi"-30 
265 
Screw 10-30 x A" Fil. 
266 
Screw 10-30 x Yi” Hdls. 
629 
Ball A" Steel 
672 
Pin A" x A" 
696 
Pin Yb" x 9/16" 
963 
Stone 1" x 10" turned 
(Code 1002) 
977 
Rubber Pad, Medium 
981 
Rubber Pad, Thin 
1078 
Pin Yb" x Yt" 
1821 
Escutcheon Pin No. 15 
1852 
Grease Gun 
2009 
Fiber Thread Protector, 
Vb" 
2110 
Motor Pulley 2Vfi" Vee 
Belt (98) D. 262 
2178 
Pin, A" x 13/32" 
2180 
Spring for 3776 
2214 
Packing for Eccentric 
3896 
2324 
Drip Pipe Assembly 
(2311-2349) 
REPAIR PARTS NOT ILLUSTRATED 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
2349 
Street Elbow 
2448 
Pin .075" x %" 
2948 
Pin, tV' x 13/16" 
2951 
Spring for Osc. Link 0. 
S. (see 4024) 
3771 
Bevel Gear 12T No. L. 
148 in 3782 
3772 
Bevel Gear 24T No. L. 
148 in 3766 
3787 
Cover for Tip-up Slot. 
Blank in 3789 
3788 
Name Plate (use 1821 
pins) 
3793 
Bell Crank for Bolt. Blank 
in 3866 
3796 
Packing for Carriage End 
Cover 
3811 
Lens Clamp Fork (3814) 
3814 
Lens Clamp Fork Blank 
in 3811 
3816 
Friction Clip for Ecc. 
Blank in 3811 
3818 
Ball Bearing Cup, Blank 
in 3840 
3819 
Ball Bearing Cone, Back 
Shaft 
3820 
Ball Bearing retaining 
Washer 
3823 
Gear, mitre. Blank No. 
L. Ill 
3828 
Vertical Shaft, Center 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
2 
Screw 10-30 x %" Fil. 
5 
Screw 10-30 x W' Hdls. 
13 
Screw Vi"-30 x %" Hdls. 
18 
Screw 10-30 x %" Fil. 
31 
Screw %"-20 x %" Fil. 
34 
Screw V4"-30 x %" Set 
40 
Screw 7-40 x -£■" Fil. 
145 
Screw V4"-30 x %" Set 
435 
Screw 10-30 
2247 
Clip for Contact Plate 
2431 
Screw 3-56 x W' But. 
2838 
Pin Vs" x 13/16" 
3751 
Friction Leather ■&" 
3754 
Chisel Point for Index 
Dial 
3755 
Chisel Point Spg. Index 
Dial 
3756 
Chisel Point Screw Index 
Dial 
3773 
Range Post for Index Dial 
3841 
Index Dial (Range Post 
is No. 3773) 
3842 
Index Dial Stem 
3843 
Contact Plate (38-2009- 
2247-2/2431-2/3845- 
3846) 
3844 
Contact Plate Arm (5) 
3845 
Contact Plate Adj. Screw 
3846 
Contact Plate Adj. Screw 
Plate 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3853 
Base for Water Can 
3854 
Stud for Water Can Base 
3855 
Yoke for Carriage (2/13- 
34-145-154-435) 
3856 
Wood Cup Bearing 
3859 
Pivot Stud for Carriage— 
Right 
3860 
Pivot Stud for Carriage— 
Left 
3861 
Eccentric to Position 
Lenses (3922) 
3862 
Handle for Eccentric 
No. 3861 
3863 
Handle Stem (3862) 
3864 
Oscillator Link 
3887 
Oil Cup, Hinged 
3906 
Water Can (4026) 
3907 
Water Can Nozzle 
3908 
Water Can Nozzle Joint 
(3907) 
3909 
Valve Stem (3910) 
3910 
Valve Stem Head 
3922 
Screw %"-30x*" in 3861 
4022 
Ball Cup for Link, 
Threaded 
4023 
Ball Cup for Link, 
Grooved 
4024 
Ball Cup Spring 
4025 
Tube for Valve Stem 
4026 
Screw to Clamp Tube 
(4025) 
Section XI - Page 30 EDGE GRINDING 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3830 
Carriage Comp. (4/2-44- 
681-2180-2838-4/3492- 
3546-3760-3761-3763- 
3764-3765-3766-3767-3774 
3775-3776-3777-3779-3781 
3782-3783-3784-3785-3786 
3789-3790-3791-3792-3794 
3795-3797-3798-3799- 
2/3800-3801-2/3802-3803 
3804-3805-3806-3808-3809 
3812-3813-3815-3817-3820 
3821-3822-3827-3829-3831 
3866-3873-3874-2/3887 
3830 
3851 
Connector for Switch 
Wire 
3852 
%" Bushing for Wire 
3858 
Cone Bearing, Upper 
3865 
Ball Cup Bearing in Link 
O. S. See 4022, 4023 
3877 
Sponge Tube—Collar 
3888 
Stone on Arbor (963- 
3889) 
Stock 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
3889 
Stone Arbor only, Comp. 
(4/116-3880-3881-3882) 
3929 
3932 
Lens Clamp, Upper, Blank 
3933 
Lens Clamp, Lower,Blank 
3934 
Lens Clamp, Spring 
3935 
Lens Clamp Hinge Pin 
3937 
Lens Clamp, Upper Mach. 
(3932) 
3938 
Lens Clamp, Lower Mach. 
(3933) 
4014 
Motor Base Comp. (4/62- 
4/92-3/141-519-4/976- 
4008-4009-4010-2/4011- 
4012-3/4013) 
4020 
Switch for Motor 
4021 
Switch Box B. 345 
STAND No. 78A Takes 
4/28-4/112-4/1113-4/1130- 
2/1947-1949-4028 
Section XI - Page 31 SECTION XII 
BENCH WORK ASSEMBLY BENCH WORK ASSEMBLY 
When assembling a pair of lenses into a frame a preliminary inspection of the 
lenses and frame will eliminate much breakage. The correct size of both lenses and 
frame being of primary importance. 
Inspect the lenses for bevel and chips first. The bevel should be straight and 
of the correct pitch. A sharp bevel will contact the eyewire at only one point and 
sooner or later will flake. A safety bevel should be run on all lenses. Examine 
the lens closely for minute chips in the edge of the bevel, a small chip here will 
also result in a flake sooner or later. 
If a lens flakes during assembly or after completion, it is the fault of the 
benchman, not the edge grinder, because if the benchman had inspected the lens care- 
fully before assembling it would have been sent back to the edger to be corrected. 
All lenses coming from the edger should be marked at the top of the lens, R for 
right lens and L for left lens* It is important that the identity of each lens be 
definitely established because in the majority of the cases the lenses will be of 
unequal power. Where a cylindrical element is incorporated in the lens the reversal 
of the lenses would result in the axes being off. Decentration would be reversed 
and produce twice the original amount in the opposite direction, the same holds true 
in the case of a prismatic correction. Example: If the right lens was decentered 
in 2 m.m. and the left lens decentered in 1 m.m., upon reversal of the lenses you 
would have a total decentration of 3 m.m. out when the desired was 3 m.m. in, giving 
a resultant of 6 m.m. decentration in the wrong direction. This amount of de- 
centration would produce a decided prism in even a weak lens. 
When dealing with sphere cylinders always check and mark the lens up again 
before proceeding with the assembly. The same rule applies to prism corrections. 
The next step is a close examination of the frame. Check for eye size to be 
sure that the proper size frame has been selected for the job. On almost all frames 
the eyewire will need to be bent to conform more closely with the shape of the 
lens. The most glaring of these is the lack of sufficient forward curve at the top 
of the eyewire. This can be corrected by placing the bit of the screw dfiver in the 
channel of the eyewire from the bade, or temple side, and pushing forward until the 
desired curve is attained. This must be done while the end pieces are together, or 
it will result in the eyewire being twisted. 
Next, remove the endpiece screws allowing the eyewire to open. Again you will 
find one or two places needing bending in order tomatch the lens shape more readily. 
The more common of these are the spots just below the endpiece and the top of the 
frame. These few slight straightening bends will correct most all new frames. 
Next, using the rat-tail file in the channel, file off the raised lip you will 
find at the junction of the endpiece and the eyewire. This small lip, if left on, 
will often cause flaking after delivery of the completed job. 
Now that you have inspected the lenses for bevel, chips, proper size, and 
flakes, and the frame has been bent to proper shape and the junction lip filed off, 
the bevel wiped clean, and the eyewire channel cleaned out, you are now ready to 
insert the lenses in the frame. 
A lens is placed in the frame, being careful to center the ridge of the bevel 
in the channel all the way around, and the endpieces are gradually drawn together 
with a pair of pliers. Use a gentle steady pressure in this operation, never 
forcing, and constantly checking to see that the ridge of the bevel is in the channel 
Section XII - Page i BENCH WORK ASSEMBLY 
of the eyewire at all times* If it is not possible to completely close the end- 
pieces, with a gentle pressure, notice if the bevel is in the channel of the eyewire* 
If it is, then the fault lies with the edgegrinder for not having removed enough 
glass* If the endpieces close properly, attempt to twist the lens in the eyewire 
to determine whether or not the lens is too small* You should not be able to move 
the lens* If you can move the lens in the eyewire, it may be tightened by use of a 
lens washer* Place the washer in the channel of the eyewire and place the lens in 
over it* 
After the lens and frame are correctly matched the endpiece screw is inserted 
and tightened. Tighten gently, it is easy to flake a lens in this operation. 
After the lenses have been inserted recheck the whole job for chips, flakes, 
looseness, strain (under the Colmascope) and be sure that the endpieces fit flush 
with each other. 
PROCEDURE 
Inspect bevel for pitch and trueness. 
Inspect lens for chips and flakes. 
Check lenses for correct markings and remark where required. 
Check frame for eye size and shape. 
Check eyewire for shape and file endpiece lip. 
Clean the bevel and the eyewire channel. 
Insert the lenses and check for fit. 
Final assembly and final check. 
FINAL FRAME ASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION - With the lenses correctly installed in 
the front you are now ready for the final assembly and inspection. 
First check the bridge sire and the temple length against the Rx. 
Affix the temples and tighten the endpiece screws all the way down. Each 
temple should have about a 15 degree spread. This can be accomplished by filing 
the check lug on the butt of the temple until the desired spread is attained* 
Next lay the job down on a flat surface with the temples open. The curve of 
each temple and the top of each eyewire should touch the surface. If they do not, 
adjust the pantoscopic or retroscopic tilt of the offending temple by bending the 
endpiece of that temple as explained under endpiece angling in Fitting and Adjusting. 
Next close the temples and if they do not lie straight and even across the back 
of the glasses adjust until they do by bending the endpiece as above. 
Now make any special bends that may be called for on the Rx, such as; special 
shaping of the bridge, unequal spread of pads, etc. 
Section XII - Page 2 BENCH WORK ASSEMBLY 
FINAL INSPECTION 
1* Both eyes on line and four points touching. 
2. Bridge symmetrical or bent to Rx specifications and aligned properly with 
the eyewires. 
3. Distance between lenses (D.B.L.) verified* 
4. Check the distance between the optical centers of the lenses for inter- 
pupillary distance or decen tration* 
5. Check temples for proper length. 
6. Measure width between temples one inch back of joint and check with Rx. 
7. Temples aligned, open and closed. 
8. Joints of endpieces closed and parallel. 
9. Screws not scored. 
10. No gaps in the eyewi re. 
11. Completed job clean (lenses, pads, and rims) 
12. No plier marks or scratches of any kind. 
PANTOSCOPIC TILT - The angling of the temple by bending the endpiece downward 
toward the bottom of the lens. 
RETROSCQPIC TILT - The angling of the temple, by bending the endpiece, upward 
or toward the top of the lens. 
Section XII - Page 3 SECTION XIII 
SURFACE GRINDING SURFACE GRINDING 
A prime requisite for rapid and successful lens surfacing is cleanliness. Keep 
the benches, machines and tools free from emery and all the different abrasives in 
separate covered receptacles. Lens and shell (Lap) must be thoroughly washed after 
each operation, using a brush if necessary to be sure that every particle of the 
coarser emery is removed. Particular care should be taken to keep the protractor, 
vertometer and prescription trays clean so that the finished surfaces will not be 
abused. 
Select a lens blank as near as possible to the shape of the finished lens and 
allow no more thickness than is necessary. To finish a surface to the same curve as 
the blank which is put in work will necessitate the removal of at least 0.6 mm. of 
glass. Where the curve on the finished lens is to be different from that on the 
blank, allowance in thickness should be made for the difference in the depths of 
the curves in addition to that necessary for surfacing. (See M.S.S.S. Chart 2-0-112). 
To compute lens thickness where a center thickness grinder is used, it is 
necessary only to compute the cylinder value on the 180° line of the lens, find the 
strap and center thickness and spot the center. Having this point to control the 
thickness, and the calipering points marked out symmetrically to the 180° line, 
there will be no prismatic effect if the opposite calipering points are kept equal, 
regardless of the actual lens thickness or location of the cylinder axis. 
If a center thickness grinder is not available, it is necessary to know the 
actual edge thickness at the calipering points. This may be found by the use of 
the following Power of Cylinders Chart: 
Degrees 
Value for 
Degrees 
Value for 
From 
Ax is 
1.0 D 
From Axis 
1.0 D 
0 
180 
.00 
45 
135 
.50 
5 
175 
.01 
50 
130 
.59 
10 
170 
.03 
55 
125 
.67 
15 
165 
.07 
60 
120 
.75 
20 
160 
.12 
65 
115 
.82 
25 
155 
.18 
70 
110 
.88 
30 
150 
.25 
75 
105 
.93 
35 
145 
.33 
80 
100 
.97 
40 
140 
.41 
85 
95 
.99 
Inasmuch as the spherical power of a compound lens is a constant it is only 
necessary to determine the spherical equivalent of the cylinder at the given axis. 
Example : 
+5.00 (cylinder) axis 60 
+5.00 (cylinder) x .75 (Percentage as taken from chart) equals +3.75 actual 
power of cylinder at the cutting line (180°). 
Example: 
+1.00 (Sphere)+2.00 (Cylinder) x 135 
+2.00 (Cylinder) x .50 (Percentage as taken from chart) equals +1.00 actual 
power of cylinder at the cutting line (180°). 
Section XIII - Page 1 SURFACE GRINDING 
+1.00 (Sphere) +1.00 (Spherical equivalent of cylinder) equals +2.00 actual 
power of the compound lens at the cutting line (180°). 
For cylinder powers other than 1.00 D. use the last column as percentages of 
the given cylinder value. 
In the case of single vision lenses, which can be calipered at any point on 
the periphery, it is possible to make the calipering points symmetrical with the 
cylinder axis regardless of the 180° line so that all four measuring points will be 
of equal thickness in prescriptions without prism. 
Prism will never be ground on a lens if the lens size and power permits the 
results to be obtained by decentration as described in Subject 0-104. 
On blocking the lens it is necessary to center the lens on the block, using 
enough blocking pitch to be sure of firm attachment. Heat glass and block slcwly to 
prevent cracking, apply pitch to both, and press glass onto block. 
When using rough emery inspect the lens frequently for prism and press the thick 
side to keep the blank symmetrical. 
Before using a medium or smoothing emery be sure the lens is clear of all 
coarse emery. Grind with smoothing emery until all pits and scratches have dis- 
appeared. 
The fining process should require no longer than 2 or 3 minutes and the lens 
should have a smooth black appearance. A lens properly fined will polish out in 
a minimum of time. Much off-focus trouble is caused by insufficient fine grinding 
and too much polishing. 
For polishing, a good grade of closely woven serge should be used. The thinner 
the better so long as the pitch does not work through. 
Heat the shell and apply a thin even coat of pitch. Apply the polishing cloth 
and press down with the mate shell. (Lap). 
Inasmuch as resin is available at Medical Supply Depots and tar can be obtained 
from similar installations of the Engineer Corps, the processing of pitch can be 
accomplished under most field conditions. A satisfactory formula consists of 10 
quarts of resin to 1/4 pound of tar. During cold weather the tar content may be 
increased to as much as 3/4 of a pound to increase its qualities of adhesion. 
The rouge should be applied moist, frequently and in small quantities. When 
the lens is nearly polished, allow the rouge to work itself out and for the last 
few minutes of finishing run the polisher nearly dry. This removes all stripes and 
produces a very high finish on the lens surface. The finishing must be watched 
very closely to prevent the polisher from heating and softening, which would destroy 
the accuracy of curve of the surface and stripe the lens. 
When the lens is polished it must be removed from the block. Allow the lens 
to cool slightly after polishing, then place in ice water, or better still, set 
lens block down on a cake of ice which may be kept in any available container. 
This will contract the pitch and loosen the lens from the block. The lens may 
then be cleaned with alcohol (wood or denatured) to remove excess pitch and other 
materials. 
Section XIII - Page 2 SURFACE GRINDING 
The grinding tools or shells will be gauged for curve accuracy each time they 
are used. A full set of gauges for this purpose will be standard equipment in all 
Army optical repair units required to do surface grinding. 
LENS THICKNESS - It is a well known fact that while plus lenses are thickest 
at the center, minus lenses are thinnest at the center. In shop practice, however, 
problems arise which demand a much more accurate knowledge regarding the thickness 
of lenses. 
In order to answer such questions, it is necessary to know the depth of the 
curves, called the "Sagitta". A formula can be obtained by applying the Pythagorean 
theorem to the triangle formed by the center inner surface, the center outer surface 
and the apex of the lens. 
In order to eliminate the necessity for solving a mathematical problem each 
time a lens thickness is required, M.S.S.S. Chart 2-0-112 has been prepared for your 
guidance. 
Example: Assume a minus lens with an outside curve of 4-6.00 D, an inside 
curve of -10.00 D, and a center thickness of 0.5 mm. What is the edge thickness if 
the lens has a diameter of 52 mm,? 
Answer: In the 52 mm. column, M.S.S.S. Chart 2-0-112 shows a depth of 6.82 
mm. for 10.00 D and a depth of 3.91 mm. for a 6.00 D curve. The difference between 
these depths is 2.91 nm. This would be the edge thickness if the lens had no center 
thickness. Since, however, the center thickness is 0.5 mm., the edge thickness is 
not 2.91 mm. but 2.91 4*0.5 inn. r 3.41 mm. 
The usual optical shop method of determining lens thickness is computed in 
points. It is necessary to determine whether the calipers are calibrated at 5 or 10 
points per millimeter as both types are in common use. For instructional purposes, 
we will assume all calipers to be calibrated at 5 points per millimeter. 
By using the following formula a close approximation can be made: 
Millimeters (diameter) 
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 
Points per diopter. 
2 2 2H 2K 2U 3 3 3K 
Example: Assume a minus lens with an outside curve of 4-6,00 D, an inside 
curve of -10,00 D, and a center thickness of 0.5 mm. What is the edge thickness 
if the lens has a diameter of 52 mm. 
Answer: Obviously the power of the lens is -4,00 D. The diameter of the lens 
being 52 mm. the chart gives 3Vi points per diopter as the multiplier. The desired 
center thickness is 0.5 mm. or 2Vi points. Therefore the answer would be derived as 
follows: 
4 x 3Vt = 16XA points (edge) 
Example: Assume a plus lens with an outside curve of 410.00 D, and an inside 
Section XIII - Page 3 SURFACE GRINDING 
curve of -6.00 D, and an edge thickness of 0.5 mm. What would be the center 
thickness if the lens has a diameter of 52 mm.? 
Answer: The power of the lens is plus 4.00 D. The diameter of the lens being 
52 mm. the chart gives 3H points per diopter as the multiplier. The desired edge 
thickness is 0.5 mm. or 2l/i points. Therefore, the answer would be derived as 
follows: 
4 x 3Vi + 2Vi - 16V4 points (center) 
This method, while not absolutely accurate, is of sufficiently close approxima- 
tion to warrant its general use to eliminate involved mathematics when a depth 
of curves chart is not available. 
SHURON OPTICAL COMPANY 
Section XIII - Page 4 SURFACE GRINDING 
DEPTH OF CURVES 
INDEX 1.53 
MSSS Chart 2 -0 -112 
Power 
DIAMETER 
OF LENS IN MILLIMETERS 
34 
36 
38 
40 
42 
44 
46 
48 
50 
52 
0.25 
0.07 
0.08 
0.08 
0.10 
0.11 
0.12 
0.13 
0.14 
0.15 
0.16 
0.50 
0.14 
0.16 
0.1 7 
0.19 
0.21 
0.23 
0.26 
0.28 
0.30 
0.32 
0.75 
0.20 
0.23 
0.25 
0.28 
0.31 
0.34 
0.37 
0.41 
0.44 
0.48 
1.00 
0.27 
0.31 
0.34 
0.38 
0.42 
0.46 
0.50 
0.55 
0.59 
0.64 
1.25 
0.34 
0.38 
0.42 
0.47 
0.52 
0.57 
0.62 
0.68 
0.74 
0.80 
1.50 
0.41 
0.46 
0 .51 
0.5 7 
0.63 
0.69 
0.75 
0 .82 
0.89 
0.96 
1.75 
0.48 
0.54 
0.60 
0.66 
0. 73 
0.80 
0.87 
0.95 
1.03 
1.12 
2.00 
0.55 
0.61 
0.68 
0.76 
0.83 
0.92 
1.00 
1.09 
1.18 
1.28 
2.25 
0.61 
0.69 
0.77 
0.85 
0.94 
1.03 
1.13 
1.23 
1.33 
1.44 
2.50 
0.68 
0.77 
0.86 
0.95 
1.04 
1.15 
1.25 
1.36 
1.48 
1.60 
2.75 
0.75 
0.84 
0.94 
1.04 
1.15 
1.26 
1.38 
1.50 
1.63 
1.76 
3.00 
0.82 
0.92 
1.02 
1.14 
1.25 
1.38 
1.50 
1.64 
1.78 
1.92 
3.25 
0.89 
1.00 
1.11 
1.23 
1.36 
1.49 
1.63 
1.78 
1.93 
2.09 
3.50 
0.96 
1.07 
1.20 
1.33 
1.46 
1.61 
1.76 
1.91 
2.08 
2.25 
3.75 
1.03 
1.15 
1.28 
1.42 
1.57 
1.72 
1.88 
2.05 
2.23 
2.41 
4.00 
1.09 
1 .23 
1.37 
1.52 
1.67 
1.84 
2.01 
2.19 
2.38 
2.58 
4.25 
1.16 
1.31 
1.46 
1.61 
1.78 
1.96 
2.14 
2.33 
2.53 
2.74 
4.50 
1.23 
1.38 
1.54 
1.71 
1.89 
2. 07 
2.2 7 
2.47 
2.68 
2.90 
4.75 
1.30 
1.46 
1.63 
1 .81 
1.99 
2.19 
2 .40 
2.61 
2.84 
3.07 
5.00 
1.37 
1.54 
1.72 
1.90 
2.10 
2.31 
2.53 
2.75 
2.99 
3.24 
Sect ion XIII - Page 5 SURFACE GRINDING 
34 
36 
38 
40 
42 
44 
46 
48 
50 
52 
5.25 
1.44 
1.62 
1.80 
2.00 
2.21 
2.43 
2.65 
2.89 
3.44 
3.41 
5.50 
1.51 
1.70 
1.89 
2.10 
2.32 
2.54 
2.79 
3.04 
3.30 
3.57 
5.75 
1.58 
1.77 
1.98 
2.20 
2.42 
2.66 
2.92 
3.18 
3.46 
3.75 
6.00 
1.65 
1.85 
2.07 
2.29 
2.53 
2.78 
3.05 
3.32 
3.61 
3.91 
6.25 
1.72 
1.93 
2.16 
2.39 
2.64 
2.90 
3.18 
3.47 
3.77 
4.08 
6.50 
1.79 
2.01 
2.24 
2.49 
2.75 
3.02 
3.31 
3.61 
3.93 
4.26 
6.75 
1.86 
2.09 
2.33 
2.59 
2.86 
3.14 
3.44 
3.76 
4.09 
4.43 
7.00 
1.93 
2.17 
2.42 
2.69 
2.97 
3.27 
3.58 
3.90 
4.25 
4.60 
7.25 
2.00 
2.25 
2.51 
2.79 
3.08 
3.39 
3.71 
4.05 
4.41 
4.78 
7.50 
2.08 
2.33 
2.60 
2.89 
3.19 
3.51 
3.85 
4.20 
4.57 
4.95 
7.75 
2.15 
2.41 
2.69 
2.99 
3.30 
3.64 
3.98 
4.35 
4. 73 
5.14 
8.00 
2.22 
2.49 
2.78 
3.09 
3.42 
3.76 
4.12 
4.50 
4.90 
5.32 
8.50 
2.36 
2.65 
2.97 
3.29 
3.64 
4.01 
4.40 
4.80 
5.23 
5.68 
9.00 
2.51 
2.82 
3.15 
3.50 
3.87 
4.26 
4.68 
5.11 
5.57 
6.05 
10.00 
2.80 
3.15 
3.52 
3.92 
4.34 
4.78 
5.25 
5.75 
6.27 
6.82 
10.50 
2.95 
3.32 
3.71 
4.13 
4.58 
5.05 
5.54 
6.07 
6.63 
7.21 
11.50 
3.25 
3.66 
4.10 
4.57 
5.06 
5.59 
6.15 
6.74 
7.37 
8.03 
12.00 
3.40 
3.83 
4.30 
4.79 
5.31 
5.87 
6.46 
7.09 
7.76 
8.46 
13.00 
3.71 
4.19 
4.70 
5.24 
5.82 
6.45 
7.11 
7.81 
8.56 
9.38 
14.00 
4.03 
4.55 
5.11 
5.71 
6.36 
7.05 
7.79 
8.58 
9.43 
10.34 
15.00 
4.36 
4.93 
5.54 
6.21 
6.92 
7.68 
8.51 
9.40 
10.36 
11.41 
Section XIII - Page 6 SURFACE GRINDING 
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING 
AO M415A HAND SURFACING MACHINE 
Every machine is carefully tested and operated for several days before it is 
packed for shipment. With ordinary care and attention, and provided the following 
instructions are carefully followed, and AO M415A Hand Surfacing Machine will give 
long and satisfactory service. 
Before this can be mounted on the bench, screws "C" must be removed to allow 
the top housing to be separated from the lower housing. We recommend a one-half 
horse power motor for a single machine; two spindles require one horse power; three 
spindles, one and one-half horse power, etc. This eliminates any possibility of 
overloading the motor under all conditions. 
The lap spindle is provided with a detachable tapered end which can be removed 
by unscrewing with an ordinary wrench. The speed of this spindle is the same as that 
of the driving pulley. If the machine is used for both grinding and polishing, the 
driving pulley should run at approximately 875 RPM with the top turning toward the 
operator. For polishing only, the speed can be increased to suit individual 
requirements. 
Section XIII - Page 7 SURFACE GRINDING 
OILING - Follow the chart to obtain long and satisfactory service. All small 
bearings on this machine should be oiled before operating. Pour into the gear box 
the supply of AO M231 Oil furnished with the machine. This oil should be changed 
every three months. When changing, if it is not convenient to secure AO M231 Oil, 
use Fiske’s K-30 or its equivalent. 
REPAIRS - When necessary to reach inside the machine, remove the four screws 
"B" under the dust shield. The lap spindle, bearings, and gear can then be taken 
out as an entire unit and every part easily reached for repairs 
Section XIII - Page 8 SURFACE GRINDING 
AO M415 
SURFACING MACHINE 
DESCRIPTIVE LIST OF REPAIR PARTS 
When ordering repair parts, always give serial and catalog numbers of the ma- 
chine; also catalog number and description of the part required. Whenever possi- 
ble, the old part should be submitted with the order. Improvements and changes 
have been made on AO machines at different times, and full information will assist 
us greatly in interpreting your requirements and also assure you of prompt service. 
Part 
Price 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
Each 
1 
Bushing .... Not Available 
1-A 
Bushing — oilless type (not illus- 
trated) 
$3.50 
♦ _2 
Bushing .... Not Available 
3 
Ball bearing with part 21 ... 
4.00 
4 
Fiber washer for No. 15 . 
.10 
5 
Gits oiler 
.20 
6 
Fil. H’d screw 
.05 
7 
Upper flange bearing 
5.50 
8 
Plug 
1.50 
9 
Plug 
.20 
10 
Felt washer for No. 2 
.10 
11 
Taper pin 
.05 
12 
Gear (driver) 
4.50 
13 
Shaft (horizontal) 
3.00 
14 
Lap holder 
2.50 
15 
Spindle (Vertical) 
3.50 
16 
Taper pin 
.05 
17 
Gear (driven) 
4.50 
18 
Gasket for No. 8 
.10 
19 
Washer for No. 13 
.75 
20 
Flat H’d screw for No. 19 
.05 
21 
See part 3 
22 
Cover 
2.50 
23 
Fil. H’d Sc’r for 24 
.05 
24 
Cover 
2.75 
24-A 
Gasket 
.25 
25 
Gits oiler 
.35 
26 
Gits oiler 
.10 
27 
H’dless set screw 
.05 
28 
Spindle guard 
2.00 
29 
Upper bushing 
10.50 
30 
Bushing (lower) 
3.00 
31 
Socket wrench 
1.00 
32 
Treadle 
1.00 
33 
Treadle conn 
.45 
34 
Pin 
.15 
35 
Cotter pin 
.05 
36 
Cap 
.25 
37 
Hex head screw 
.05 
38 
Latch 
1.00 
39 
Pin 
.15 
40 
Treadle hanger 
1.25 
* 2-A 
Bushing — oilless type (not illus- 
trated) 
3.50 
Part 
Price 
No. 
DESCRIPTION 
Each 
41 
Cotter pin 
$ .05 
42 
Cap 
.25 
43 
Hex. head screw 
.05 
44 
Driving pulley 
2.50 
45 
Sq. H’d set screw for No. 44 . 
.05 
46 
Ball oiler 
.10 
47 
Loose pulley with bushing . 
4.50 
48 
Bushing .... Not Available 
48-A 
Bushing—oilless type (not illus- 
trated) 
2.75 
49 
Hand lever bearing 
.75 
50 
Nut 
.10 
51 
Pivot screw 
.20 
52 
Yoke 
2.50 
53 
Yoke sleeve 
1.00 
54 
Handwheel 
.60 
55 
Yoke bracket 
1.75 
56 
Square head set screw .... 
. .05 
57 
Fil. H’d screw 
.05 
58 
Washer 
.20 
59 
Driving pin 
.20 
60 
Stem with pin part 59 .... 
1.00 
61 
Handwheel 
.45 
62 
Hand lever 
2.75 
63 
Slide cap 
.75 
64 
Fil. head screw 
.05 
65 
Slide cap 
.75 
66 
Shipping rod 
1.00 
67 
Collar 
.35 
68 
Wrench 
.25 
69 
Spring 
.40 
70 
Screw eye 
.05 
71 
Cotter pin 
.05 
72 
Square H’d set screw 
.05 
73 
Collar 
.50 
74 
Fulcrum rod 
.60 
75 
Hex. nut 
.05 
76 
Bell crank lever 
1.25 
77 
Screw eye 
.05 
78 
Shoulder screw 
1.20 
79 
Shipper fork 
.60 
80 
Set screw 
.10 
81 
Steel pan (not illustrated) . 
6.50 
Section XIII - Page 9 SURFACE GRINDING 
AO M415 
SURFACING MACHINE 
PARTS IN DETAIL 
Section XIII - Page 10 SURFACE GRINDING 
AO M415 
SURFACING MACHINE 
PARTS IN DETAIL 
Section XIII - Page 11 SECTION XIV 
INSPECTION LENSOMETER 
Tke Instrument 
1. Adjustable eye piece. 
2. Wide range prism measurer, indicates prismatic 
power and direction of prism. 
3. Lens marker—for centering and axis marking 
(practically automatic). 
4. Aligning device—rack and pinion operated—permits 
extra-fine adjustment. 
5. Adjustable for height. 
6. Modern design for strength and beauty. 
7. Auxiliary prism holder—for measuring bifocal seg- 
ments and extra-strong prismatic powers. 
8. New lens holder—natural hold. 
9. Clear and substantial target. 
10. Protractor wheel—clearly defined axis marker. 
11. Standard lamp in bakelite housing. 
12. Power wheel—graduated readings in fractional diop- 
ters between +20 and —20. 
13. Sturdy construction—durable finish. 
14. Magnifying attachments—give more accurate read- 
ings. 
15. Lens aligning plate. The geometrical axis of the lens 
should be aligned with the 0— 180 line of this plate. 
16. Lens positioning tube. 
Fig. 4. Illustration showing major parts of Lensometer 
Section XIV - Page 1 LENSOMETER 
Diagram showing a cross section of the Lensometer Junior with an 
ophthalmic lens set up in position to be tested 
Section XIV - Page 2 LENSOMETER 
INSPECTION 
The final inspection of spectacles must determine whether or not they have been 
processed in accordance with the prescription. Every detail must be accurately 
checked and from these findings a reasonable tolerance will be permitted by Unit 
Commanding Officers. 
The inspector should familiarize himself with a routine step-by-step check in 
order to eliminate the possibility of completely overlooking part of the inspection 
routine. When practicable, the inspection will be made from the original pre- 
scription or a carbon copy thereof rather than the work order. This procedure will 
tend to eliminate errors that may occur in transferring the prescription from the 
original to the work order. 
The lenses being the most important feature of the spectacles should be in- 
spected first, for foci, axis, decentration and prism. The frame should then be 
checked for correct eye size, bridge measurement, pupillary distance and temple 
length. The final step of the inspection should be for proper assembly including 
proper lens insertion, alignment of front and temples and freely working end pieces, 
The inspection of lenses may be accomplished by neutralization with test lenses 
or preferably the lensometer with which each unit is equipped. A lens guage or 
measure should not be used to inspect processed work as it does not determine the 
power of a lens; it merely measures surface curvature. It may well be used during 
the operations of surface grinding or duplication of lenses. 
A lens is said to be of a certain power when it will neutralize a lens of the 
same power but of opposite sign. Since, in this method the refractive power of the 
lens is measured instead of the curvature of the surfaces, it is a decided improve- 
ment over the lens measure. For symmetrical lenses it produces accurate results. 
For unsymmetrical lenses it is inaccurate in that it measures the focal length from 
the front surface of the lens. 
Owing to the concave curvature of meniscus or toric lenses, it is customary to 
apply the neutralizing lens to the convex surface. This measures the power at the 
point of contact. 
The best method of verifying lens power is by the use of a lensometer or sim- 
ilar instrument. The optical principles underlying the construction of this in- 
strument are such that it will reveal the following information with accuracy: 
1. The effective power of spheres. 
2. The effective power of cylinders. 
3. The effective power of compound lenses. 
4. The power of prisms. 
5. The direction of prismatic power. 
6. The axis of cylindrical lenses. 
7. The optical center of lenses. 
8. The power of bifocal segments. 
The Lensometer consists of four component parts: 
1. Eye piece including prism measuring device. 
2. Adjustable stage and hold down clamp. 
3. Large wheel on the right side of the instrument numbered in red and 
white. (White is /, red is -.) This is known as the power or diopter wheel. 
4. Round dial on back of instrument numbered from 0° to 180° known as 
the axis dial or protractor dial. 
Section XIV - Page 3 LENSOMETER 
Operation of the Lensometer 
Preliminary Adjustment 
The instrument should always be adjusted to the eye of the examiner before 
lenses are analyzed. This adjustment is accomplished as follows: 
Tdrn the graduated power wheel until the zero position is directly opposite 
the arrow on the indicator. While looking into the eyepiece, rotate it uritil the 
circulars of the reticule are sharp and clear as in Figure 8A. If the instrument 
has been properly adjusted the squares and bands of light on the target will be 
sharply defined as in Figure 8B. 
Fig. 8C—Reticule 
and Target combined 
Fig. 8A—Reticule 
Fig. 8B—Target 
Superimposed on the reticule a clear image of the combined reticule will be 
seen as in Figure 8C. 
With the instrument set correctly for the operator’s eye, we are ready to 
proceed with any of the tests outlined on the following pages. 
Fig. 9. Section showing proper oosition of lens being examined 
Analyzing Spherical Lenses 
Insert the lens to be tested with the back or ocular surface against the lens 
positioning tube (See Figure 9). 
While looking through the eyepiece, revolve the graduated power wheel until 
the squares are fairly distinct as in Figure 10A. Then move the lens until it is 
centered. This is indicated by the squares falling within the circle engraved on 
the reticule of the eyepiece as in Figure 8C. 
Next, the power wheel is moved away from the operator, causing the squares to 
be blurred slightly as in Figure 10B then the power wheel is slowly turned toward 
the operator until the squares are sharp as in Figure 8C. Do not turn the power 
wheel back and forth by small amounts, because the most rapid and accurate settings 
are made as described. If you wish to verify the findings, repeat the entire 
operat ion. LENSOMETER 
Fig. 10A—Normal image decentered 
Fig. 10B—Sphere out of focus; 
No cylinder 
Fig. 11A—Sphere and cylinder 
out of focus; Axis off 
The power of the sphere can be read directly from the graduated wheel -white 
numerals indicating plus power, and red numerals indicating minus power. 
Analyzing Plano Cylinders 
Set the power wheel at zero and insert the lens to be tested with the ocular 
surface against the lens positioning tube, so that the geometrical axis of the lens 
is on the 0-180° line. The appearance of the target will be similar to that shown 
in Figures 11A or 11B. While looking through the eyepiece, turn the protractor on 
the instrument until the single line comes into focus and becomes a bright band of 
light. See illustration 11C. The axis of the cylinder is indicated on the pro- 
tractor. 
Now rotate the power wheel until the three lines come into focus, as in Figure 
HD, carefully turning the power wheel until the sides of the rectangles are very 
sharp. 
The power of the cylinder can now be read directly from the power wheel - pos 
itive if white, negative if red. 
Fig. 11B—Sphere in focus; Axis off 
Fig, 11C—Sphere in focus; Axis correct 
Fig. 11D—Cylinder focused 
Analyzing Sphere Cylinders 
Place the lens with its ocular surface against the positioning tube of the in- 
strument or in other words with the front surface of the lens towards the operator. 
1. Bring to sharp focus either the single line as in Figure 11C or the triple 
line as in Figure HD by slowly and simultaneously rotating in either direction the 
power and protractor wheels. Note the power reading on the power wheel. Now by 
rotating only the power wheel bring the opposite set of lines into sharp focus and 
note the power reading on the power wheel. Take the reading of least plus (or 
greatest minus) for the power of the sphere (the Army deals only in plus cylinders). 
Set the power wheel at the reading of least plus (or greatest minus) and rotate the 
protractor wheel until the single line is in sharp focus as in Figure 11C. The 
reading of the protractor gives the axis of the cylinder and the power wheel gives 
the power of the sphere. 
Section XIV - Page 5 LENSOMETER 
2. Now focus the three lines of the target by rotating only the power wheel. 
This gives the second reading, the power of the sphere and the cylinder combined. 
By subtracting the first reading (sphere power) from the second reading (sphere and 
cylinder power combined) the power of the cylinder is determined. 
Sphere - Least plus or greatest minus reading. 
Axis - Protractor reading when single line is in focus for sphere power. 
Cylinder - Second reading minus the first reading. 
Examples: 
1. 
First reading: 
Power wheel 
/1.00D 
Protractor wheel 
85 
degrees 
Second reading: 
Power wheel 
/2.50D 
Sphere - /I. 00 
Cylinder - /1.50 
ax 85 
Rx /I. 
00 /I. SO 
ax 
85 
2. 
First reading: 
Power wheel 
-3.00 
Protractor wheel 
90 
degrees 
Second reading: 
Power wheel 
-2.50 
Sphere - -3.00 
Cylinder - /0.50 
ax 90 
Rx -3. 
00 /0.50 
ax 
90 
3. 
First reading: 
Power wheel 
-2. 25 
Protractor wheel 
50 
degrees 
Second reading: 
Power wheel 
/I.00 
Sphere - -2.25 
Cylinder - /3.25 
Rx -2. 
25 /3.25 
ax 
50 
Prisms and Decentration 
With the Lensometer, it is a simple matter to decenter lesnes to obtain a 
predetermined amount of prismatic power, without the use of tables or any calcul- 
ations whatsoever. 
Fig. 12. Prism measuring device 
Assume a spherical lens is to be decentered 3.00 prism diopters at 45°. First, 
place the lens with its ocular surface against the positioning tube, and after 
focusing with the power wheel align it for geometrical center. The target will then 
appear as in Figure 8C. Then set the prism axis scale on the telescope tube (see 
Section XIV - Page 6 LENSOMETER 
Figure 12) at 45° and move the lens on the positioning tube until the center square 
of the target is on the third circle of the reticule and exactly in line with the 
dark axis line of the reticule, which has now been set at 45°. The target will then 
appear as in Figure 13. It will be noted that each circle on the reticule represents 
1.00 prism diopter. Without changing the position of the lens, mark it with the 
centering device to denote the amount and direction of decentration necessary to 
produce that prismatic power. If the prism to be checked exceeds 5.00 prism di- 
opters, insert an auxiliary prism in front of the telescope tube. Generally, a 
5° prism from the trial case will answer the purpose. 
Verifying Finished Lenses 
SPHERES - Set the graduated wheel to the prescription value and insert the 
lens against the positioning tube. If the images are sharp, as in Figure 8C, the 
lens is correct. If the wheel has to be turned, say, 0.12 Diopter to bring the 
image to a sharp focus, then the lens is incorrect by that amount. 
big. 12A. Power Wheel 
CYLINDERS - To verify a cylinder set the power wheel to 0.00, and the axis 
wheel to indicate the axis on the Rx. Place the lens on the positioning tube, with 
the geometrical axis horizontal and perfectly aligned on the 0-180° line. The image 
as seen should be three rectangles, extending along the same line as in Figure 11C, 
with faint bands extending out of each rectangle but sharply defined on their sides. 
This tests the cylinder for absence of power along the axis. 
Next, move the graduated wheel to the cylindrical power appearing on the Rx. 
The rectangles and ribbons should be parallel to each other and should be sharply 
defined along their former indistinct direction as in Figure 11D. 
SPHERO-CYLINDERS - Set the power wheel according to the spherical power 
appearing on the Rx; also set the small power indicator on this wheel at the same 
position. The rest of the operation is the same as for cylinders, always taking 
the spherical power instead of zero power as a starting point, and the sum of the 
Section XIV - Page 7 LENSOMETER 
spherical and cylinder powers for the second 
reading. The difference between the first and 
second readings represents the cylindrical power 
of the lens. 
Prismatic Power 
To determine if a lens has been properly 
Jecentered, set the power and the axis wheels 
at their proper positions and place the lens on 
the positioning tube with the geometrical center 
and, in the case of a cylinder, with the axis 
perfectly aligned. Next turn the prism axis 
scale to the correct position. The image in the 
case of a decentered sphere should be as in Fig- 
ure 13. 
This is a simple attachment supplied on 
every Lensometer of the improved model by which 
the alignment of a pair of spectacle lenses, mounted and ready to deliver, can be 
checked for alignment of axes and prismatic power. Often lenses that have been pro- 
perly surfaced are cut or edged off axis or with the wrong amount of decentration. 
Fig. 13. 
Target showing power of three prism diopter 
Alignment of Spectacles 
Fig. 16. Close up of aligning device 
Section XIV - Page 8 LENSOMETER 
Also there is a possibility of perfectly surfaced and edged lenses being im- 
properly mounted in a frame, either because the frame is out of "true", or because 
the drilled holes are not correctly positioned, or for various other reasons. As 
it is essential that the finished work comply in full with the specifications of the 
Rx, every job should be checked on the Lensometer before delivery to the patient. 
When not in use, the aligning device should be in its lower position, as in 
Figure 9. When it is desired to check a mounted prescription, the device can be 
raised, as in Figure 16 and the mounting placed thereon. 
To check such work, set the power wheel, the axis scale, and the prism scale 
in their proper positions and check one lens. Then move the aligning device to the 
right or left and check the other lens, being careful not to change the up and down 
position of the device. 
Any discrepancy in the alignment of the finished Rx can readily be located and 
corrected before the work is sent out. 
Section XIV - Page 9 SECTION XV 
EMERGENCY REPAIRS OF SPECTACLES EMERGENCY REPAIRS OF SPECTACLES 
Optical repair units operating in the field should confine emergency repairs to 
those eyeglasses that the individual cannot dispense with during the period of time 
it takes to process replacement spectacles. 
There is a wide divergence of purpose between an emergency repair and a 
regular optical repair. An emergency repair, as implied by the name, is of a 
temporary nature whereas a regular repair must render the eyeglasses serviceable 
for ordinary usage. 
Emergency repairs will not apply to spectacles (Government Issue) or gas mask 
inserts as a sufficient stock of these items should at all times be available for 
replacement purposes. It is expected that repairs of an emergency nature will be 
confined to rimless eyeglasses and xylonite frames. 
Individuals that have provided themselves with eyeglasses other than government 
issue will find it difficult, if not impossible, to have mountings or frames 
replaced with other than those of government issue. 
Inasmuch as field optical repair units are not provided with diamond drills for 
perferating glass, it is obvious that the only method of repairing broken lenses 
contained in rimless eyeglasses will be by the use of sealing wax, Wills edge cement 
or some similiar substance that can be used to adhere the broken pieces together. 
Such a repair is not permanent but will usually suffice for a sufficient period of 
time to permit the processing of replacement government issue spectacles. 
Temporary repairs can be made on broken xylonite frames in the following manner: 
Dissolve small pieces of xylonite in acetone until the substance compares in con- 
sistency with a thick syrip. Then dip the broken ends in the substance and place 
them carefully and firmly together. It will be necessary to devise a means, 
similiar to a clamp, to hold the ends together as it will require a considerable 
period of time (ten to twenty-four hours) for the solution to become a solid. When 
the rupture has been annealed it may be smoothed and polished by the use of un- 
adulterated acetone applied with the fingers or a smooth cloth. 
Frame repair screws may be used to replace missing glass screws as a tap of the 
correct sixe is standard unit equipment. 
The soldering of metal frame parts should be held to a minimum. A frame that 
has broken in one place is usually weakened in other locations and a front or temple 
replacement is advisable. 
Broken rimless mountings will have to be soldered as such items are not supplied 
to any type of field optical repair unit. 
Gas mask spectacle temples may be used as replacements on any metal frame. 
Although gas mask spectacles are not to be worn under a gas mask, the frames should 
be used as replacement parts whenever practicable. The fact that a temple may not 
be of the same design will not prohibit its being used as a replacement in the field. 
Many eyeglasses will be presented for repair that will test the ingenuity of 
the technical optician. In as much as repairs of this type consume excessive time, 
it is advisable to confine the production of field optical repair units to the 
repair and replacement of government issue spectacles and gas mask inserts. 
It will be to the advantage of all mechanical optical technicians to familiarixe 
themselves with the contents of Par. 24, War Department Pamphlet 8-5» which is 
quoted in its entirety as follows: 
Section XV - Page 1 EMERGENCY REPAIRS OF SPECTACLES 
"24. Replacement and repairs; optical repair and replacement units.--a. 
Before spectacles, commercial type, or spectacles, gas mask type, are replaced 
or repaired, the responsible officer will assure himself that loss or breakage 
was in the performance of military or official duty and that no carelessness was 
involved. Complete replacement will be limited to those individuals entitled 
to spectacles in accordance with the basis of issue as set forth in paragraph 
21• Instances of losses or breakages in excess of three per year will be 
especially investigated and reported with recommendation to The Surgeon General 
if in continental United States; to the department or force surgeon concerned 
in the case of military establishments beyond the continental limits of the 
United States. On review of the evidence The Surgeon General, the department 
surgeon, or the force surgeon will determine whether replacement or repair will 
be made at public expense. Repairs of breakages in the performance of duty 
will be further governed by the following instructions: 
(1) If one lens only is broken, replacement in kind will be made, provided the 
individual’s frame is of durable construction with rims and temples, 
decision as to durability to rest with the responsible medical officer. 
If the frame is not durable, new spectacles according to specifications 
and with untinted lenses will be issued. 
(2) If both lenses are broken, replacement will be made by untinted lenses per 
eyeglass specification, these to be placed in the individual’s eyeglass 
frame, provided the frame is of durable construction with rims and 
temples, decision as to durability to rest with the station surgeon. If 
the frame is not durable, new spectacles, according to specifications and 
with untinted lenses, will be issued. 
(3) A frame, if broken, will be repaired provided it is of durable construction 
with rims and temples, decision as to durability to rest with the 
responsible medical officer. If the frame is not durable, new spectacles 
according to specifications and with untinted lenses will be furnished. 
b. Optical repair and replacement units have been and are being made available 
in the various theaters of operation, and whenever possible these facilities 
should be used for the above purposes." 
Section XV - Page 2 SECTION XVI 
SHIPPING AND PACKING SHIPPING AND PACKING 
The importance of packing spectacles in a manner that will permit them to 
arrive at their destination in a serviceable condition cannot be overemphasised. 
Often, the person for whom the spectacles were processed, will have changed 
station and it will be necessary to forward the package over long distances* The 
unavoidable rough handling spectacles will receive during transit will probably 
render them unserviceable if they have been loosely packed* 
The procedure should be as follows if practicable: Wrap the glasses with tissue 
paper and place in the spectacle case* Wrap the spectacle case in corrogated paper 
until it fits tightly in the spectacle mailing box. Wrap the box with heavy paper 
and tie firmly with cord. 
For further guidance the following paragraphs have been extracted for War 
Department Pamphlet 8-5, 30 April 1943: 
(A) "Spectacle mailing boxes.--Spectacle mailing boxes are stocked at the St. 
Louis Medical Supply Depot, St. Louis, Mo., being identified as Item No. 9N071-00, 
and are to be used as containers for eyeglasses being mailed personnel who have 
departed from their station prior to receipt of eyeglasses. Requisitions for this 
item will be forwarded to the office of the Surgeon General, caution being used to 
requisition such moderate quantities as the demand necessitates. Spectacle mailing 
boxes will not be purchased from the branch offices of the optical companies under 
contract. • 
(B) "Shipment and packing.--In the event spectacles, commercial type, are 
received from optical branches by posts, camps, or stations within the continental 
limits of the United States to be issued to military or other authorized personnel 
who have been assigned to oversea duty, the packing of such eyeglasses for shipment 
to APO addresses will be as follows: 
a. Each individual pair of eyeglasses with case will be wrapped in a 
package or box for shipment, showing on the face thereof the name, serial number, 
grade, and APO address of the person for whom it is intended. 
b. The individual packages will then be placed in one large package or 
box and mailed to the respective APO Address. The procedure as outlined will elimi- 
nate unnecessary work on the part of the Army post office and all shipments will be 
handled more expeditiously." 
(C) "Disposition of eyeglasses when address of individual is unknown.--When 
eyeglasses are received after the individual for whom they are intended has been 
transferred and every effort has been made without success to determine the correct 
address to which the eyeglasses should be forwarded, inquiries for the correct ad- 
dress may be made of The Adjutant General." 
The original optical prescription from which the spectacles were processed will 
be returned to the individual for whom it was intended* If it is desired to retain 
a file of prescriptions, a copy will be made for filing purposes. 
The responsibility for packing and shipping should be delegated to one member 
of the optical repair unit and he should be impressed with the fact that packages 
improperly addressed and spectacles carelessly packed will constitute a loss of 
material, time and man power efficiency that cannot be countenanced in a rone of 
operations* 
Frequent inspection by the officer in charge of the optical repair unit will 
tend to eliminate the possibility of spectacles never being received by the in- 
dividual for whom they were intended or in such condition as to render them un- 
serviceable. 
Section XVI - Page 1 SECTION XVII 
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR 
OF EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF EQUIPMENT 
Field optical repair units are supplied with the finest mechanical equipment 
obtainable. Due to war time manufacturing difficulties the equipment on comparative 
units may vary as to the manufacturer. Basically the operation will be similiar, 
but the maintenance and repair involves a problem that makes it essential for oper- 
ators of these units to be familiar with all optical machinery regardless as to the 
manu facturer» 
The importance of preventive maintenance cannot be over emphasized. Field 
optical repair units operate in zones of operation outside the Continental limits 
of the bhited States and will find it difficult to replace worn or damaged equipment 
and must therefore inaugurate a program of maintenance that will assure the con- 
tinued and efficient operation of thei r mechanical equipment* 
Each item must be cleaned daily to remove the abrasives that accumulate from 
the grinding processes. If extreme care is not exercised, these abrasives will work 
into the spindles and bearings causing undue wear and premature replacement of parts. 
Each item of equipment must be lubricated at the intervals specified on the 
lubrication charts furnished by the manufacturer. The proper S.A.E. grade of oil 
or grease will be used when obtainable. If the specified grade of oil cannot be 
obtained, use the next higher S.A.E., number in warm weather and the next lower 
S.A.E., number in cold weather* For example: If the arbor bearing on an edging 
machine should specify S.A.E. #30, and it could not be obtained, S.A.E. #40 would 
be used in warm weather and S.A.E. #20, would be used in cold weather. The fore- 
going will apply to all types of lubricants* 
In addition to optical machinery each mobile unit will have a 2 1/2 ton truck, 
a 1 ton trailer and a gasoline electric generator that must be maintained in oper- 
ating condition. 
First echelon maintenance on the truck and trailer will be performed by the 
driver. This will consist of lubrication, proper inflation of tires, care of bat- 
tery, tightening of nuts and bolts and such minor repairs as may be necessary. Each 
Medical Depot Company will have personnel trained to perform second echelon mainten- 
ance. Third and fourth echelon maintenance will be performed by the Ordnance Corps. 
The driver will also operate the gasoline electric generator and is responsible 
for its maintenance and repair. Each generator has a Service manual and parts list 
supplied with it and in as much as several different makes of this item are being 
supplied it is essential that all instructions received with the unit be retained 
for reference. 
For the guidance of mechanical optical technicians. Volume 4 of the Medical 
Supply Services School text book, contains service charts and parts lists of each 
piece of equipment that will be supplied mobile or portable optical repair units* 
These charts may be readily located in the following manner* Select the subject 
to which the equipment pertains and immediately after the operational instructions 
will be found the desired charts and parts lists. 
For example: 
Subject 0-109 (Marking and Qitting) 
American Optical Co. diamond cutter and Shuron Optical Co., 
wheel cutter. 
Subject 0-11 (Edge grinding) 
American Optical Co., M. 840 A edging unit. 
Shuron Optical Co., 77 A, edging unit. - etc. 
Section XVII - Page 1 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF EQUIPMENT 
If it becomes necessary to requisition replacement parts, it is imperative that 
the requisition contain all the information pertaining to the desired parts- Specify 
the manufacturing company, the parts number, its nomenclature and quantity desired. 
Requisitions submitted with insufficient information will cause undue delay and will 
thereby render the equipment unserviceable over a period of time that is not con- 
sistent with the Army program of maintenance. 
Ingenuity must be exercised to improvise at all times to maintain each piece of 
equipment in satisfactory operating condition. 
Section XVII - Page 2 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
ABERRATION The failure of a lens to bring all the rays of light to an exact 
focal point. 
ADDITION The difference in power between the reading and distance portions 
of a bifocal lens. 
ASPHERIC With surfaces other than spherical. 
ASTIGMATISM That defect of a lens whereby a point object is imaged as a line 
or a pair of lines instead of as a point. 
AXIS The imaginary line passing through the optical center of a lens 
system. Also used to designate the meridian of no power in a 
cylinder lens. 
BASE CURVE The uniform curve on which a series of lenses is made. In the 
case of toric lenses, the curve of rotation. 
BEAM A group of parallel rays of light. 
BICONCAVE With two concave surfaces. 
BICONVEX With two convex surfaces. 
BI FOCAL With two focal lengths. A bifocal lens is in effect two lenses 
joined together. 
BINOCULAR Pertaining to vision with two eyes. 
BODY A piece of iron, glass or other material which is used to support 
a lens during the grinding and polishing operation. 
BLOCK An iron body. May hold one or more lenses. 
BLOCKING Attaching lenses to a block or body in position for grinding. 
BRIDGE Central connecting portion of a spectacle frame or mounting. 
CALIPERS An instrument of the shear type used for accurate thickness 
measurements. They were formerly often calibrated in "Points", 
but are now used only in either fifths or tenths of millimeters. 
CATARACT That diseased condition of the eye in which the crystalline lens 
or lens capsule becomes opaque. 
CENTER The optical center of a lens - the mechanical center. The nose- 
piece or connecting member of spectacles or eyeglasses. 
CENTER OF 
ROTATION 
That point near the center of the eyeball about which it rotates. 
The center of rotation is about thirteen mm. behind the cornea. 
CEMENT A material used to cause a segment or wafer to adhere to the 
distance lens. Hence the lens and segment taken together. A 
cemen t hi focal. 
CHTPPING Removing surplus glass with plier. 
Page 1 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
CHROMATIC Pertaining to color. 
CHROMATIC 
ABERRATION 
The inability of a lens to focus light of different colors at a 
single point. 
CHUCK A device used to center and hold objects - a work holder. 
COMA Spherical aberration of oblique pencils of light, so named from 
the comet-shaped image of a point formed by a lens exhibiting 
coma. 
COMPOUND A lens having both spherical and cylindrical elements. 
CONJUGATE Joined together; coupled to one another. 
CONJUGATE 
FOCAL POINTS 
A pair of points on the axis of a lens so related to each other 
that an object placed at either one is imaged at the other. 
CONVERGENT Proceeding toward a point. 
CROWN GLASS 
OPHTHALMIC 
The glass from which ophthalmic lenses are made. Distinguished 
from flint glass which has a higher index of refraction. 
CRUMBING Reducing the size of lens by flaking or chipping off small parti- 
cles of glass with the use of plier tool. 
CURL The bend in the temple member of a spectacle which fits around 
the ear. The bend in the metal of a spectacle bridge adjacent 
to the shank attaching it to the eye-wire or strap. 
CUTTING LINE The 180° line of a lens or the meridian from which the axis is 
measu red. 
CYLINDER LENS A lens, one of whose surfaces is a portion of a cylindrical 
surface. 
D. B. L. Distance between lenses. 
DCC Double concave - same curves on both sides of lens. 
DCX Double convex - same curves on both sides of lens. 
DECENTRATION The distance between the optical center of a lens and its actual 
or geometrical center. Decentration is a means of obtaining 
prismatic action. 
DEGREE One three hundred and sixtieth part of the circumference of a 
circle. The unit used for designating the position of the axis 
of a cylinder or sphero-cylinder. 
DEVIATION The change of direction of a ray of light as in passing through 
a prism. 
DEPRESSED 
BIFOCAL 
Circular reading portion depressed in a countersink ground in the 
surface of the major lens so that the edge will be flush. 
DIFFUSION The scattering of light. 
Page 2 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
DIOPTER The unit of measurement of the refractive power of a lens. A lens 
whose focal length is one meter has a power of one diopter. A 
lens whose power is four diopter has a focal length of one-fourth 
of a meter. 
DISPERSION The separation of light into its component colors, as in passing 
through a prism. 
DISTORTION That defect of a lens whereby the images of straight lines appear 
curved. 
DIVERGENT Proceeding from a point. 
DIVIDING LINE The junction of the distance and reading surfaces in a bifocal 
lens. 
DOWEL Pin to hold two members in position and to hold temples, such as 
in endpiece of spectacle frame or mounting. 
DROP EYE Referring to the shape of lens wherein the lower portion is ex- 
tended to increase field of vision. 
EDGE The flat or angled surface, usually fineground, which limits the 
refracting surface of a lens. It is the edge which determines 
the shape of a lens; i.e., round, oval, octagon, etc. 
EMERGENT "Coming out of it"; the emergent surface of lens is the surface 
from which the light leaves the lens. 
EMERY The abrasive used for grinding a lens surface. It is the mineral 
corundum and is found principally in Africa and Asia Minor. 
END- PIECE Lugs at the sides of frames or attached to lenses for the purpose 
of holding temple members. 
EQUIVALENT 
FOCAL LENGTH 
The focal length of a lens which is equal in refractive power to a 
series of two or more lenses. 
EYE The side of a pair of spectacles or eyeglasses. Refers to right 
or left, or to size or shape. 
EYE*WIRE The rim forming a holding member for lenses. 
FAR POINTS That point upon axis of the eye which is sharply imaged on the 
retina when the accommodation is relaxed. The far point of an 
emmetropic eye lies at infinity. As the eyeball rotates in its 
socket, the visual axis also rotates. The far point, being upon 
the visual axis, may occupy any position upon- the FAR POINT 
SPHERE. 
FINING Last step of grinding operation preparatory to polishing lens 
surfaces. 
FLAT BLANK A flat piece of glass suitable for grinding a lens, 
FLINT GLASS A glass of high refractive index containing lead, as distinguished 
from crovn glass. 
Page 3 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
FOCUS The points to which the rays of a pencil of light converge, or 
from which they diverge. 
FRONT The main body comprising the "eyes" and "bridge" of spectacles. 
FUSED GLASS Glass welded together by heat. Term used to designate a Kryptok 
type bifocal, 
GAUGE An instrument used for checking the accuracy of curvatures and 
other linear dimensions. 
GEOMETRICAL 
CENTER 
The point lying in the middle of every diameter of a lens. Some- 
times called the mechanical center as distinguished from the 
optical center. 
GLAZING Inserting or mounting lenses in frames. 
GUARDS Clips for attaching members of an eyeglass. 
HIGH- BOW Frames or mountings having bows - or endpieces - set above the 
mechanical center. 
INDEX OF 
REFRACTION 
The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of 
the angle of refraction of a ray of light traversing the surface 
between the two mediaj also the ratio of the speeds of light in 
the two media. 
INFINITY In optical science the term "infinity" is used to denote a dis- 
tance so great that rays of light from the distance may be re- 
garded as parallel. 
IN SET The horizontal distance from the 90° meridian of a bifocal lens 
to the geometrical center of the segment. 
ISOTROPIC Of equal refractive index: Optically uniform. 
JUMP That performance of objects when viewed through lenses having 
uneven surfaces, or through bifocal lenses at the margin of the 
joinder of the two fields. 
KRYPTOK A trade name for a fused bifocal lens. 
LAP A tool having a surface curvature which is imparted to a piece of 
glass by rubbing the two together with an abrasive between. 
LEAD GLASS Flint glass - high index. 
LENTICULAR POWER Lens power - power to converge or diverge light rays. 
MAGNIFYING POWER The ability of a lens to enlarge the image of an object. The 
magnification o f an area i s the square of the linear magnification. 
The magnification of a lens is found by dividing the distance of 
ten inches by the equivalent focal length of the lens. Example: 
A 2" lens has a linear magnifying power of 10 -f 2 ■ 5x. 
MEDIUM. Anything through whi oh light passes. 
Page 4 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
MEN I SCU S Crescent shaped* In ophthalmic, practi ce, meniscus lenses are made 
with a base curve of 6 diopters. 
MERIDIAN A line at right angles to the optical axis of an optical system. 
MONOCULAR Pertaining to vision with one eye. 
MOLDED BLANK A pressing with a curved surface molded on each side, usually plus 
and minus 6.0 Diopter curve. 
MOUNTING LINE The 1 ine on which lenses are mounted in spectacles, 
NEUTRALIZATION The combining of two lenses of opposite powers so as to produce 
a resultant without power. 
NORMAL A line drawn at right angle to another line or to a surface; a 
pe rpendi cul a r. 
OBLIQUE Slanting; not at right angles. 
OPHTHALMl C Pertaining to the eye. 
OPTICAL CENTER The point at which the line of centers cuts the lens. This is the 
thickest point on a convex lens and the thinnest point on a con- 
cave lens. 
OPTICAL CROSS Two lines intersecting in the center at right angles. 
PADS Guards or clips supporting the nose-piece. 
PANTOSCOPIC Tilted position of spectacles to compensate for various angles, 
PCC Perioscopic concave, a-H«25 base curve. 
PCX Periscopic convex, a -1.25 base curve, 
PERI SCOP IC A spherical lens having a 1.25 D. base. 
PITCH A material used to hold the lens to the block during surfacing 
operations. It is composed ordinarily of a mixture of pitch and 
resin. 
PLANE Flat - without curvature. 
PLANO -CYLINDER A cylindrical lens having no spherical power. Usually has a plane 
base (plane cylinder), but may be toric with any base curve 
(Toric cyl. ). 
POINT Unit of measure for lens thickness, calipering - usually 1/5 mm, 
POWER - LENS The ability of a lens to bring light to a focus. The unit of 
power of lenses is the diopter. 
PRESBYOPIA Old age sight; the loss of accommodative power of the eyes with 
advancing age. 
Page 5 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
PRESCRIPTION The formula for the lenses required by a patient. 
PRISM A wedge-shaped piece of glass having piano sides. Also under- 
stood as a point in a lens, outside the optical center, at which 
a radial displacement of a bean is produced. 
PROTRACTOR A device for indicating the center, axis or segment insert of a 
lens. It consists of a card or plate having a circle divided into 
360° and two major axes indicated at 180° and 90° for centerings 
PUPILLARY The distance in MM between the centers of the pupils in either 
PI STANCE distance or reading visions 
RADIUS Half the diameter of a circle. The curvature of a surface is 
expressed in radius of curvature for precision work. 
REFLECTION The throwing back of light which is incident upon a surface. 
RIDING BOW ( R. B.) A spectacle temple which rests on the ear and curls around it. 
ROUGE (The French word for Red). A polishing material, so named from 
red oxide of iron, though often applied to other polishing mater- 
ials, such as "Black Rouge", "White Rouge", which are not red. 
ROUGHING Grinding with coarse abrasive to shape the lens surface. 
R. P. M. Revolutions per minute. 
SEGMENT The reading portion of a bifocal lens - usually in the form of a 
segment of a circle - may be round. 
SEMI - FINI SHED A lens blank finished on one side only. 
SIDES Referring to temple pieces, or bows. 
SPHERE A surface, every point of which is equidistant from a point within 
called the center. 
SPHERICAL 
ABERRATION 
The defect of a lens due to its spherical surfaces, whereby rays of 
light incident upon the lens at different distances, from the 
optical axis are not convergent by the lens to a common focus. 
STRAIN In glass, an internal tension due to poor annealing, or to glass 
not of uniform coefficient of expansion* 
STRAP THICKNESS The thickness of a lens at the holes or at the point over which 
the strap of the frame fits. 
STRIA 
(PI. Striae) 
A streak in glass caused by imperfect mixture of the ingredients. 
It is actually a variation in the refractive index. 
SURFACING The operation of grinding the surface of a lens. 
TEMPLE The side pieces of a spectacle, usually resting on the ears to 
support the frame. 
TOOL A shell or lap cut to a prescribed surface curvature and used for 
grinding or polishing a lens. 
Page 6 GLOSSARY OF OPTICAL TERMS 
TORIC Pertaining to a torus or ring-shaped solid. One or both surfaces 
of a toric lens are sections of a torus. 
TRANSPOSITION Changing the curves of a designation of a lens without changing 
its refractive value. 
TRUING More often referring to the correction of inaccuracies of surfacing 
tools caused by previous uneven grinding. May apply to the 
straightening and lining-up of a pair of glasses. 
VERTEX That point at which the optical axis of a lens intersects the 
su rface. 
VERTEX POWER The refractive power of a lens measured from its vertex to its 
principal focus. Vertex power is the significant fractor in 
determining the power of a correction lens. The unit of measure- 
ment of vertex power is the Vertex Diopter. 
WAFER (Segment) A very thin lens, which is cemented to a major lens to 
form a bifocal. 
Page 7 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
CONTENTS 
Paragraph Page 
Previous directives rescinded 1 1 
Authority 2 1 
Designation of types of spectacles 3 2 
Specifications 4 2 
Refraction of eyes 5 2 
Procurement and issue of spectacles, commercial type, at home 
stations 6 3 
Elimination of 1/8 diopters in prescribing 7 3 
New lenses for change of prescription 8 3 
Shipment and packing 9 3 
Spectacle mailing boxes 10 3 
Inquiry when address of individual is unknown 11 3 
Classification of spectacles, commercial type, spectacles, gas 
mask type, and eyeglass, gas mask, Ml 12 3 
Certification of "Receiving Report" 13 4 
Pertinent data to be typed on Prescription Order Form 14 4 
Daily forwarding of forms to optical companies under contract. . . 15 5 
Contract information not to be divulged 16 5 
Permanent record of prescription for spectacles, commercial type, 
and eyeglass, gas mask, Ml 17 5 
Personnel entitled to eyeglasses 18 6 
Basis of issue of spectacles, comnercial type 19 7 
Basis of issue of eyeglass, gas mask, Ml 20 8 
Tinted and especially shaped lenses 21 10 
Lenses other than those supplied under existing contracts 22 10 
Frames of spectacles for ordinary wear other than those supplied 
under existing contracts 23 10 
Replacement and repair of spectacles, commercial type 24 10 
Replacement and repairs; eyeglass, gas mask, Ml 25 11 
Replacement and repairs; spectacle, gas mask type 26 11 
Optical repair and replacement units 27 11 
Fitting and repair cases for spectacles, commercial type 28 11 
Fitting case for eyeglass, gas mask, Ml 29 11 
Replacement of used or damaged articles of Item 36275 case, spec- 
tacle, fitting and repair; Item 93540, case, fitting, eyeglass, 
gas mask. Ml; and Item 30900, case, trial lens 30 12 
Stations within continental limits of United States 31 12 
AGO 326B 589101--44 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
1. PREVIOUS DIRECTIVES RESCINDED, a. This pamphlet supersedes War Department 
Pamphlet No. 8-5, 30 April 1943; Section I, Circular No. 118, War Department 1943; 
Section II, Circular No. 131, War Department 1943; Circular No. 16, War Department 
1944; Section IV, Circular No. 55, War Department 1944; and all previous instructions 
pertaining to the procurement of spectacles for military and other authorized per- 
sonnel, including instructions issued by The Surgeon General in letters, radiograms, 
and teletype messages to the commanding generals of the service commands which are 
inconflict with this pamphlet. 
b. The need for careful study of this pamphlet cannot be overemphasized, nor 
the importance of having this directive brought to the attention of the proper 
officers of the eye clinics as expeditiously as possible. 
2. AUTHORITY. The authority for the procurement and repair of spectacles 
is as follows: 
a. For United States Army personnel, including Army nurses, member of the 
Women’s Army Corps, and other militarized female personnel of the Army. 
(1) The Surgeon General will provide all military personnel with spectacles, 
when required, and will replace lenses and frames when either or both are damaged 
or lost in the performance of military duty. 
(2) The Surgeon General will prepare such instructions as may be necessary and 
make such contracts and incidental arrangements as may be required. (See AR 40-1705.) 
b. For authorized military personnel of any country the defense of which the 
President deems vital to the defense of the United States, when such authorized 
personnel are stationed within the forty-eight States and the District of Colunbia, 
and military personnel, wherever located, of all co-belligerent countries who 
cannot reasonably obtain eyeglasses or replacement and repair thereof from facilities 
of their own country. 
(1) For medical care and treatment of authorized personnel of any country whose 
defense the President deems vital to the defense of the United States when such 
care and treatment cannot be obtained from medical units of their own country. (See 
Military Appropriation Act, 1944, and S. G. 0. Circular Letter No. 71, 17 July 1942, 
as amended by S. G. O. Circular Letter No. 178, 16 December 1942.) 
c. For internees (prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens undergoing 
internment by the War Department). 
(1) Spectacles will be furnished for internees on the same basis as for United 
States troops. Cost incident thereto is chargeable to funds allocated to The 
Surgeon General. 
d. Repair and replacement of eyeglasses for civilian employees of the War 
Department and Red Cross workers on military missions overseas. 
(1) Necessary repair and replacement of eyeglasses belonging to civilian 
employees of the War Department and Red Cross workers on military missions overseas 
will be accomplished by repair and replacement units without cost to the individual. 
(See AR 40-590.) 
3. DESIGNATION OF TYPES OF SPECTACLES. There are two types of spectacles 
issued by The Surgeon General; spectacles, commercial type (for ordinary wear), and 
AGO 326B 
Page 1 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
Eyeglasses, Gas Mask, Ml (for use beneath the gas mask). There have previously been 
issued spectacles, gas mask type, which have been found impracticable for wear 
beneath the gas mask because of the lack of perfect adjustment of the temple, which 
created discomfort and prevented gas tightness. Such spectacles which are out- 
standing, are authorized for use as an auxiliary spectacle for ordinary wear. 
Hereafter, repairs of the spectacles, gas mask type, will be limited to replacement 
of lenses only, and in instances where frames of this type spectacle are no longer 
serviceable, replacement will be made by issuance of spectacles, commercial type, 
in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 19. (See par. 26.) Hereinafter, the 
terms "spectacles, commercial type", "Eyeglass, Gas Mask, Ml", and "Spectacles, gas 
mask type" will be used to designate the specific types of eyeglasses. 
4. SPECIFICATIONS, a. Spectacles, commercial type, will conform to specifi- 
cations issued by The Surgeon General, that is, such spectacles which are issued for 
ordinary wear and are of a standard, commercial, ful-vue design with metal rims and 
temples. If military or other authorized personnel desire eyeglasses not conforming 
to the above, such eyeglasses must be purchased by the personnel concerned and 
Government funds may not be used for either whole or part payment thereof. 
b. The Eyeglass, Gas Mask, Ml, will conform to specifications issued by The 
Surgeon General, that is, those presently being furnished by the Bausch 8s Lomb 
Optical Company or by any other optical company designated or authorized by The 
Surgeon General. 
5. REFRACTION OF EYES. a. When ocular refraction is necessary and a medical 
officer is not available, request for authority to employ a civilian physician in 
the case of military and other authorized personnel on detached service with or 
without troops or at stations within the continental limits of the United States 
will be made to the commanding general of the service command concerned, in accord- 
ance with AR 40-505; for personnel on duty in the departments, to the department 
surgeon; and for personnel on duty in military establishments beyond the continental 
limits of the United States, to the force surgeon. The request for refraction will 
be approved in reasonable amount only and will include the adjustment of frames and 
fitting of spectacles when delivered. Authority for the employment of a civilian 
physician for refraction will not be granted to military and other authorized 
personnel who are under orders to report in the near future to a station where Army 
facilities are available, or who are absent temporarily for short periods from their 
proper stations where Army facilities are available. 
b. For military and other authorized personnel on duty without troops in 
foreign countries, the following instructions will apply: 
(1) Prior authority for the refraction of eyes will not be required. Accounts 
for such services at reasonable rates will be paid locally. 
(2) Spectacles, commercial type, are authorized for such personnel and should 
be procured locally at reasonable rates, frames to be of metal and of durable 
construction with rims and temples, payment for which will be made locally. However, 
the above applies only if personnel are entitled thereto as provided by paragraph 19. 
6. PROCUREMENT AND ISSUE OF SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE, AT HOME STATIONS. 
Cotmanding officers of posts, camps, and stations are responsible for the procure- 
ment and issue of all spectacles, commercial type, at home stations as early as 
possible in the training period, to personnel entitled to these in accordance with 
paragraph 19, in order to preclude mass requests for ophthalmic examination and 
Page 2 
AGO 32 6B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
procurement of spectacles, commercial type, at personnel replacement depots and 
staging areas in the event such personnel are ordered for oversea duty. Strict 
compliance with this paragraph is directed in order to avoid military personnel 
being delayed at ports of enbarkation or proceeding to oversea destinations without 
the necessary eyeglasses in their possession. 
7. ELIMINATION OF 1/8 DIOPTERS IN PRESCRIBING. Medical officers refracting 
personnel entitled to eyeglasses wil1 not prescribe lenses in 1/8 diopter variations. 
8. NEW LENSES FOR CHANGE OF PRESCRIPTION. Authority is granted to procure new 
lenses in instances where it is necessary to change the prescription. 
9. SHIPMENT AND PACKING. a. In instances where spectacles, commercial type, 
are received by posts, camps, or stations within the continental limits of the 
United States after the individuals for whom they were intended have been assigned 
to oversea duty, packing for shipment to APO addresses will be as follows: 
(1) Each individual pair of spectacles, commercial type, with case, will he 
inclosed in a spectacle mailing box for shipment showing on the face thereof, the 
name, serial number, grade, and APO address of the person for whom it is intended. 
(2) The individual packages will then be placed in one large package or box 
and mailed to the respective APO address. The procedure outlined will eliminate 
unnecessary work on the part of the Army Postal Service and all shipments will be 
handled more expeditiously. 
b. Installations within the zone of the interior should forward spectacles 
immediately upon their receipt when individuals for whom they are intended have been 
transferred to other stations. 
c. In forwarding the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml to oversea installations, or to 
stations within the zone of the interior, care should be taken to carefully pack the 
eyeglasses in order to minimize breakages. 
10. SPECTACLE MAILING BOXES. Mailing boxes for spectacles, commercial type, 
are stocked at the St. Louis Medical Supply Depot, St. Louis, Missouri, being 
identified as Item No. 9N07l-00, and are to be used as containers for spectacles 
being mailed to personnel who have departed from their stations. Requisitions for 
this item will be forwarded to the Office of The Surgeon General, caution being 
used to requisition such moderate quantities as the demand necessitates. Spectacle 
mailing boxes will not be purchased from the optical companies under contract. 
11. INQUIRY WHEN ADDRESS OF INDIVIDUAL IS UNKNOWN. When spectacles , commercia 1 
type, and/or eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, are received after the individual for whom 
they are intended has been transferred to another station or discharged from the 
service, and every effort has been made without success to determine the correct 
address to which the spectacles or eyeglasses should be forwarded, inquiries for the 
correct address may be made of The Adjutant General, Washington 25• D.C. 
12. CLASSIFICATION OF SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE, SPECTACLES, GAS MASK TYPE, 
AM) EYEGLASS, GAS MASK. a. Spectacles, commercial type, and spectacles, gas mask 
type, are classified as the individual’s personal effects and will not be taken up 
on stock record account. The eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, is not classified as the 
individual’s personal effects, but will not be taken up on stock record account. 
AGO 326B 
Page 3 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
b. Spectacles, commercial type, will be forwarded to the home address of 
individuals for whom spectacles have been ordered but who have been discharged from 
the service prior to their receipt. Individuals discharged from the service will 
turn in the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, to their respective medical supply officer. 
c. Upon an accumulation of a substantial number of spectacles, commercial 
type, or spectacles, gas mask type, which could not be forwarded to the individual 
concerned because of insufficient address, and/or the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, they 
will be forwarded to the Commanding Officer, Binghamton Medical Depot, Binghamton 
New York, inclosing therewith a memorandum stating that such spectacles could not be 
delivered or that the eyeglasses were turned in to the medical supply officer. Care 
should be taken to include with the spectacles the applicable prescription in order 
that the disassembly of such spectacles or eyeglasses may be expedited. 
d. The Judge Advocate General has ruled that military personnel who, through 
design or willful negligence with the intent to temporarily incapacitate or unfit 
themselves for full military duty or to delay shipment overseas, destroy, lose, 
discard, or dispose of spectacles which have been issued to them for the purpose of 
insuring maximum individual efficiency in the performance of their military duties, 
are guilty of a violation of Articles of War 96 by reason of being guilty of 
disorders and neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline; and 
has suggested the following form of specification to be used for such offenses: 
In that did, at on or about 
19 , wrongfully (destroy) (lose) (discard) 
(dispose of) (spectacles, commercial type) (spectacles, gas mask type) (eye- 
glass, gas mask, Ml) of the value of $ , furnished to him for use in the 
military service of the United States, thereby,(temporarily unfitting himself 
for the full performance of his military duties) (attempting to avoid im- 
portant service). SPJGA 1944/1849, 15 February 1944. 
If a medical officer has reason to believe that any individual is guilty of 
conduct as set forth above, he will submit the matter to the individual’s com- 
manding officer for such action as the latter may deem necessary. 
13. CERTIFICATION OF "RECEIVING REPORT". a. All posts, camps, and stations 
presently or hereafter holding prescriptions due to hesitancy in signing the receipt 
of purchase certificate because of lack of information that the spectacles have 
actually been received by the personnel for whom they were intended will alter the 
aforementioned certificate as authorized in b below, affix signature, and forward 
the prescriptions to the fiscal branch office for processing. 
b. The certificate of the "Receiving Report" will be changed from 
"* ♦ * that they have been delivered to the above mentioned military 
personnel * * ♦" 
to "♦ ♦ ♦ and will be delivered to the above military personnel ♦ ♦ *" 
14. PERTINENT DATA TO BE TYPED ON PRESCRIPTION ORDER FORM. In preparation 
of the Spectacle Order Form for the procurement of spectacles, commercial type, or 
eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, issued by the Government, the age of the individual con- 
cerned will be typed opposite the name, and the visual acuity (without glasses) of 
the right eye, left eye, and both eyes will be shown in the last column opposite 
"Dec. In." The letter "R" may be used for the right eye; "L" for left eye; and "B" 
for both eyes. It is further directed that information be typed on the Spectacle 
Page 4 
AGO 326B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
Order Form showing whether the order is for an initial issue, replacement, or repair. 
These data are necessary for statistical purposes and will be entered on the 
Spectacle Order Form. When the Spectacle Order Form is revised, space will be 
provided for these data. 
15. DAILY FORWARDING OF FORMS TO OPTICAL COMPANIES UNDER CONTRACT, a. Posts, 
camps, and stations procuring spectacles, commercial type, and/or eyeglass, gas 
mask, Ml, will forward the Prescription Order Form to the branch office of the 
optical company concerned for processing at the end of each day and not accumulate 
such forms for transmittal at various periods. The practice of forwarding forms 
daily will expedite the delivery of spectacles. 
b. Effective immediately, the priority classification numbering system as set 
forth in section II, Circular No. 131, War Department, 1943, is discontinued. This 
action is taken because experience has shown that requisitions bearing the lower 
priority classifications have remained outstanding for undue periods, and in view of 
the fact that spectacle requirements have become more stabilized, it is contemplated 
that the contractors will now be in a position to provide spectacle service within 
the maximum time limits specified in the respective contracts. Stations experiencing 
undue delays in the receipt of finished spectacles should bring these circumstances 
to the attention of the Office of The Surgeon Genera 1 in order that corrective 
measures may be taken. In this connection, the maximum time clauses in the contracts 
relate to the time consumed at the service point and in determining whether undue 
delays have occurred, proper consideration should be given to transit time, time 
consumed within the stations for the forwarding of the prescriptions and deliveries 
of the finished spectacles and other pertinent factors. 
16. CONTRACT INFORMATION NOT TO BE DIVULGED. Information in connection 
with contracts for the supply and repair of spectacles, commercial type, and 
eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, for military and other authorized personnel, especially 
information in regard to the charges listed therein, will not be divulged to any 
military personnel, civilian enployees of the United States Government, or any other 
individuals, with the exception of such military personnel and/or civilian employees 
of the United States Government as require the information for the execution of 
their duties. 
17. PERMANENT RECORD OF PRESCRIPTION FOR SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE, AND 
EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, Ml. a. In order to facilitate the replacement or repair of 
lost or broken lenses and spectacle frames of the spectacles, commercial type, and 
the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, a permanent record will be made. In the case of 
officers, this data will be entered on W. D., M« D. Form No. 81 (Immunization 
Register), and in the case of enlisted personnel, on page 15» W. D,, A. G» 0. Form 
No. 24 (Service Record). 
b. The following data will be made a part of such records for the spectacles, 
commercial type: 
(1) When an individual is examined and in the opinion of the prescribing 
officer, spectacles, conrnercial type, are not required, entry will be made showing 
date of examination and stating that spectacles are not necessary for theefficient 
performance of military duty. 
(2) If, after examination, it is found that spectacles are necessary, the 
following will be made: 
AGO 326B 
Page 5 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
(a) Prescription data. 
(1) Date and place of refraction. 
(2) Visual acuity of each eye and visual acuity, binocular, with and 
without correction. 
(3) Correction required for each eye. 
(4) Frame sire. 
(b) Issue data. 
(1) Date spectacles ordered and date spectacles are issued. 
(2) Number of pairs of spectacles issued to the individual. 
c. The following data will be made a part of such records in the case of the 
eyeglass, gas mask. Ml: 
( 1) Prescription data* 
(a) Correction required for each eye. 
(b) Position of eyeglass, gas mask. Ml* 
(c) Sire of the proper fitting mask. 
(2) Issue data. 
(a) Date eyeglass, gas Mask, Ml, ordered and date this item is issued* 
d. A copy of the prescription and frame measurements of spectacles, commercial 
type and/or position of the eyeglass, gas mask. Ml will be given to the individual 
concerned, and he will be instructed to keep this copy on his person at all times* 
This is necessary to avoid refraction of eyes each time repair or replacement of 
spectacles becomes necessary. Eye clinics and station hospitals will use any 
prescription form they may have adaptable for this purpose. 
18. PERSONNEL ENTITLED TO EYEGLASSES. 
PERSONNEL 
SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL 
TYPE 
EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, 
Ml 
a. 
Officers and enlisted men of 
If entitled in 
accordance with 
If entitled in accordance with 
the United States Army, in- 
paragraph 19, 
two pairs of 
paragraph 20, one pair of eye- 
eluding Army nurses, members of 
the Women’s Army Corps, and 
other militarized female per- 
sonnel of the Army 
spectacles commercial type. 
glass, gas mask, Ml. 
b. 
Warrant officers 
do. 
Do. 
c. 
Cadets, United States Military 
Academy ... 
do. 
Do. 
d. 
Aviation cadets; Army Air 
Forces 
do. 
Do. 
e • 
Contract surgeons (full time) 
of the Army * . . 
do. 
Do. 
f. 
Prisoners (United States Army 
personnel) in military custody. 
do. 
Do. 
g- 
National Guardsmen in active 
Federal Service ..... ... 
do. 
Do. 
h. 
Reserve officers on extended 
active duty with the Army . . . 
do. 
Do. 
i . 
Re serve enlisted men on ex- 
tended active duty with the 
Army 
do. 
Do. 
Page 6 
AGO 326B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
PERSONNEL 
SPECTACLES. COMMERCIAL 
TYPE 
EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, 
Ml 
j- Retired military personnel on 
active duty with the Army . . . 
If entitled in accordance with 
paragraph 19, two pairs of 
spectacles, commercial type. 
If entitled in accordance with 
paragraph 20, one pair of 
eyeglass: gas mask, Ml 
k. Members of the organized 
military forces of the Govern- 
ment of the Commonwealth of the 
Philippines in the service of 
the armed forces of the United 
States 
do. 
Do. 
1. Authorized military personnel 
of any country, the defense of 
which the President deems vital 
to the defense of the United 
States, when such authorized 
personnel are stationed within 
the fortyeight States and the 
District of Columbia, and 
military personnel, wherever 
located, of all cobelligerent 
countries who cannot reasonably 
obtain eyeglasses or replace- 
ment and repair thereof from 
facilities of their own 
count ry. 
do. 
If entitled in accordance with 
paragraph 20, and if issued a 
gas mask of the United States, 
Army type, one pair of eye- 
glass, gas mask, Ml 
m. Such civilian employees of the 
War Department on military 
missions overseas as require 
eyeglasses for the performance 
of their duties. 
Authorized for repair and re- 
placement only. 
If entitled in accordancewi th 
paragraph 20, and if issued a 
gas mask of the U. S. Army 
type, one pair of eyeglass, 
gas biask, Ml 
i> Such Red Cross workers on 
military missions overseas as 
require eyeglasses for the per- 
formance of their duties. . . . 
do. 
Do. 
o. Internees (prisoners of War and 
civilian enemy aliens) under- 
going internment by the War 
Department. 
One pair of spectacles, com- 
mercial type, only if en- 
titled in accordance with 
Paragraph 19. 
Not authorized 
19. BASIS OF ISSUE OF SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE. a. Effective imme- 
diately, the professional basis of issue of spectacles, commercial type, to author- 
ized personnel will be as follows: 
(1) To individuals requiring a correction of more than 1.00 diopter in any 
meridian in either eye. 
(2) To other individuals who, in the opinion of the prescribing officer, require 
spectacles for the efficient performance of military duties, regardless of their 
correction. 
b. Personnel entitled to spectacles will be issued two pairs of spectacles 
with the following exceptions: 
(1) Prisoners of war and civilian enemy aliens will be issued only one pair 
each. 
AGO 326B 
Page 7 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
(2) In special cases where individuals are performing unusually close work for 
which bifocals are not adapted, the number of pairs of spectacles to be issued will 
be determined by the prescribing officer* 
c. Examination for spectacles will be made as early as possible during the 
basic training period. This examination will include, but not necessarily be 
limited to, all individuals having a visual acuity of worse than 20/ 40 in either 
eye. The purpose of such examination is to avoid borderline cases reaching staging 
areas or ports of embarkation without complete examination having been made. 
d. Prescribing officers are urged to exercise the discretionary basis of 
issue (a (2) above) with careful judgment in order that spectacles will be furnished 
only when they are necessary for the official performance of military duties. 
e. When a prescription for spectacles is issued for an individual requiring 
a correction of 1.00 diopter or less in any meridian in each eye, a certification 
signed in autograph by the prescribing officer will be made on the Prescription 
Order Form setting forth in brief detail the reason for furnishing such correction 
at government expense. 
f. The certification will be typed on all copies of the Prescription Order 
Form (the original only to be signed) as follows: 
Spectacles are considered necessary for this individual because:_ 
(Name and grade) 
g» This certification is not required for bifocal corrections; however, 
prescriptions calling for corrections of 1.00 diopter or less in any meridian in 
each eye incorporating a prism in either or both eyes will include this certifi- 
cation. 
h. Prescribing officers are responsible for determining whether the in- 
dividual has previously been furnished spectacles at Government expense before 
spectacles are ordered. This responsibility can be properly discharged by re- 
quiring this information in writing from the individual’s commanding officer. 
(See par. 12d.) 
i. Commanding officers of posts, camps and stations are responsible for 
establishing proper local procedure for the issuance of spectacles. 
j. In the event an individual has in his possession a serviceable pair of 
metal rinmed spectacles, they may be considered as a second pair of spectacles, 
comnercial type, and repair thereof may be accomplished in accordance with para- 
graph 24b, 
20. BASIS OF ISSUE OF EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, M-l. a. The eyeglass, gas mask. 
Ml, will be ordered only upon the authority of a prescription by the medical 
officer in charge. The Medical Department is the responsible agency charged with 
the proper fitting, issue, and repair of this item. Basis of issue will be only to 
personnel with a visual acuity of 20/70 or worse, with both eyes open (binocular 
vision) or to personnel requiring bifocal correction in order to properly perform 
their duties while wearing the gas mask. 
Page 8 
AGO 326B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
b. The eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, will be issued only to authorized personnel 
requiring this correction (a above) as follows: 
(1) Training purposes for supervisory personnel and instructors only at the 
specific authorization of The Surgeon General* 
(2) Personnel directed to be transferred to oversea replacement depots or ports 
of embarkation for oversea shipment will be fitted with and issued the eyeglass, gas 
mask, Ml, prior to such transfer* Commanders responsible for preparing personnel 
for transfer will make every effort to secure this item for such personnel requiring 
this type eyeglass* 
(3) Individuals in those units placed in A-2 priority for the issue of con- 
trolled items of equipment will be fitted with and issued the eyeglass, gas mask, 
Ml, prior to movement to the staging area or port of embarkation* Unit commanders 
are responsible for making every effort to secure this item for all individuals 
under their comnand who require this -type eyeglass* 
c* Priority for issue of the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, is as follows: 
(1) Priority No. 1» Individuals referred to b( 2) above and individuals in 
units which are in equipment priority A-2a, 
(2) Priori ty No. 2. Individuals in units which are in equipment priority 
A-2b, 
(3) Priority No. 3. Individuals in units which are in equipment priority 
A-2c. 
(4) Priority No. 4. Individuals referred to b(l) above* 
d. The lack of the eyeglass, gas mask. Ml, will not be sufficient cause to 
prevent the movement of an individbal overseas. 
e. In order to avoid subsequent refitting of this type spectacle, the follow- 
ing procedure is established. 
(1) Each individual entitled to the eyeglass, gas mask. Ml, as outlined in a 
and b above, will have issued to him, as expeditiously as possible, a new gas mask 
having an M3 facepiece, or a mask, gas, combat, when directed* However, until such 
time as the M3 facepiece is locally available, a new gas mask with M2A2 facepiece 
will be substituted. It is essential that a properly fitted gas mask be furnished. 
This means properly fitted for the installation of the eyeglass, gas mask. Ml, as 
well as gas-tightness. Commanders will be responsible for the furnishing of a 
properly fitted facepiece to permit a satisfactory installation of the eyeglass, gas 
mask. Ml, in accordance with recommendations of the prescribing medical officer. 
The commanding officer of the post, camp, or station will be responsible for 
establishing proper procedures to expedite the accomplishment of the above for all 
personnel located at such installations, 
(2) The individual entitled to the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, will carry his 
properly fitted facepiece overseas. To accomplish this, the individual will carry 
his complete mask with him to the port of embarkation. The port commander will be 
responsible for accomplishing the following exchanges: 
AGO 326B 
Page 9 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
(a) In such cases when mask, gas, service, lightweight, is authorized in 
pertinent movement orders, the port Chemical Warfare Service officer will properly 
install a new hosetube, canister and carrier on the facepiece fitted with the 
eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, in exchange for the old hosetube, canister, and carrier. 
(b) In the event the individual has in his possession an M3 facepiece, an 
exchange of the hosetube, canister, and carrier will be made when determined 
necessary by the port Chemical Warfare Service officer. In all cases the port 
Chemical Warfare Service officer will insure proper tightness of the union between 
facepiece and hosetube. 
f. The various positions of the lens within the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, 
should usually make unnecessary any decentration of lenses in excess of in 
either the vertical or horizontal meridian. Prescriptions calling for decentration 
in excess of 2lA-nun probably indicate that the incorrect position of the eyeglass, 
gas mask, Ml, has been prescribed or that improperly fitted gas mask has been issued. 
The supplier is authorized to return .for correction those prescriptions which 
evidence that decentration could have been minimized through the use of a different 
position of the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml. 
g. At the time of issuance of the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, to military or other 
authorized personnel, it will be the responsibility of the medical officer in charge 
to instruct the recipient of the eyeglasses in the technique of inserting and re- 
moving this item from the gas mask. This is necessary in the event the eyeglasses 
or the eyepieces of the gas mask require cleaning. The individual will be cautioned 
that the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, will not be removed for any other reason. 
h. An excessive number of breakages of the lenses are being experienced at 
various installations, and it has been determined that the majority of such break- 
ages occur from excessive pressure of the eyewire on the lens. In this connection, 
attention is directed to paragraph 7, page 2a, of the "Instruction Manual for Fitting 
Eyeglass, Gas Mask, Ml", which states that after rotating the lens to the proper 
axis, the eyewire screw should be tightened and then backed off one-half turn to 
relieve excessive pressure. 
21. TINTED AND ESPECIALLY SHAPED LENSES. Tinted and especially shaped lenses 
are not authorized except in connection with repairs as covered by paragraph 24b. 
22. LENSES OTHER THAN THOSE SUPPLIED UNDER EXISTING CONTRACTS. In the event 
a lens of a special type is required other than the type supplied under existing 
contracts, authority for such purchase will be requested of The Surgeon General 
through the commanding general of the service command setting forth in detail the 
existing circumstances which necessitate such a special lens. 
23. FRAMES OF SPECTACLES FOR ORDINARY WEAR OTHER THAN THOSE SUPPLIED UNDER 
EXISTING CONTRACTS. In the event a frame is required other than the type issued 
under the existing contracts for spectacles, commercial type, due to an idiosyncrasy 
of the skin, authority for procurement of such special frame will be requested of 
The Surgeon General through the commanding general of the se-rvice command setting 
forth detailed information concerning the existing circumstances. 
24. REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR OF SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE. a. Before spec- 
tacles, commercial type, are replaced or repaired, the responsible officer will 
assure himself that loss or breakage was in the performance of military or official 
duty and that no carlessness was involved. (See par. 12d.) Complete replacement 
Page 10 
AGO 326B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
or repair will be limited to those individuals entitled to spectacles in accordance 
with the basis of issue as set forth in paragraph 19. 
b. Repairs of serviceable, metal-rimmed spectacles with temples of durable 
construction, decision as to durability to rest with the responsible medical officer 
(Par. 19j) will also be made at public expense and will be governed by the following 
(1) If one lens is broken, replacement in kind will be made. 
(2) If both lens are broken, replacement will be made with such lenses provided 
under the existing contracts (untinted). 
(3) If the frame is broken, repair will be made provided that the cost will not 
exceed the charge of a complete pair of spectacles issued by the Army. 
c. Experience has indicated that individuals are purchasing zylonite and shell 
frames and are being issued lenses at public expense for insertion therein. This 
practice is not authorized and will be discontinued immediately. 
25. REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRS: EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, Ml. Before the eyeglass, gas 
mask, Ml is replaced or repaired, the responsible officer will assure himself that 
loss or breakage was in the performance of military or official duty and that no 
carelessness was involved. (See par. 12d.) 
26. REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRS; SPECTACLES. GAS MASK TYPE (TO BE USED AS AN 
AUXILIARY PAIR OF CONWERCIAL TYPE SPECTACLES). a. In case of losses or breakages, 
replacement in whole of the spectacles, gas mask type, or repair of the frame or 
replacement of the temple will not be made but replacement will be effected through 
issuance of spectacles, commercial type, in accordance with paragraph 19. 
b. Replacement of lenses of the spectacles, gas mask type, will be made only 
after the responsible officer has assured himself that breakage was in the per- 
formance of military or official duty and that no carelessness was involved. (See 
par. 12d.) Replacement of lenses will be limited to those individuals entitled to 
spectacles, commercial type, in accordance with the basis of issue as set forth in 
paragraph 19. Lenses will be procured under existing contracts for spectacles, 
commercial type. 
27. OPTICAL REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT UNITS. Through the medium of mobile and 
portable optical repair units, repair and replacement facilities are available in the 
various theaters of operation. The optical repair facilities are attached to medical 
supply depots and whenever possible should be utilized. These facilities, however, 
are generally limited to the replacement and repair of spectacles of the type 
covered by The Surgeon General’s specifications. 
28. FITTING AND REPAIR CASES FOR SPECTACLES, COMMERCIAL TYPE. The following 
fitting and repair case is presently stocked and is issued upon requisition to The 
Surgeon General: Item 36275, Case, Spectacle, Fitting and Repair. In the event 
fitting and repair cases in excess of authorized allowances are necessary due to the 
volume of work, requisitions should be directed to The Surgeon General setting forth 
therein the number of spectacle requisitions per month being initiated at the par- 
ticular installation. 
29. FITTING CASE FOR EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, Ml. The following fitting and repair 
case for the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, is presently stocked and is issued upon 
requisition to The Surgeon General: Item 93540, Case, Fitting, Eyeglass, Gas Mask, 
AGO 326B 
Page 11 PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
Ml. This fitting case should be requisitioned by only such stations which have 
occasion to order the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, in accordance with the basis of issue 
as set forth in paragraph 20. In the event an additional fitting case for the eye- 
glass, gas mask, is necessary due to the abundance of work being performed at the 
particular installation, requisition should be directed to The Surgeon General set- 
ting forth therein the volume of work which is being performed over a monthly 
period. 
30. REPLACEMENT OF USED OR DAMAGED ARTICLES OF ITEM 36275, CASE, SPECTACLE, 
FITTING AND REPAIR; ITEM 93540, CASE, FITTING, EYEGLASS, GAS MASK, Ml; AND ITEM 
30900, CASE, TRIAL LENS. a. The following procedure is applicable for stations 
within the continental limits of the United States and those oversea installations 
procuring spectacles under the spectacle contracts entered into by The Surgeon 
General; 
(1) Components of Item 36275 and Item 30900 are to be procured under the 
commercial type spectacle contract with the American Optical Company, Southbridge, 
Mass. Copies of this contract are being distributed to all installations having 
occasion to procure the commercial type spectacles, including those installations 
procuring commercial type spectacles from the Bausch & Lomb Optical Company, 
Rochester, New York; the latter, however, for the specific purpose of procuring 
components of the aforementioned items. 
(2) Components of Item 93540 are to be procured under the contract for the 
eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, with the Bausch & Lomb Optical c°mPany, Rochester, New York. 
Copies of this contract are being distributed to all installations having occasion 
to procure the eyeglass, gas mask, Ml. 
b. Installations beyond the continental limits of the United States will 
requisition components of the above mentioned items in the usual manner. 
31. STATIONS WITHIN CONTINENTAL LIMITS OF UNITED STATES. a. Medical officers 
at installations within the continental limits of the United States will placeorders 
for spectacles, commercial type, and for eyeglass, gas mask, Ml, as heretofore on 
the Spectacle Order Form. 
b. Instructions attached to the copy of the respective optical contracts 
set forth definite procedures in procuring spectacles, commercial type, and eyeglass 
gas mask, Ml. 
WAR DEPARTMENT, 
Washington 25, D.C., 20 June 1944. 
Page 12 
A30 326B PROCUREMENT OF SPECTACLES FOR MILITARY AND OTHER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 
War Department ftmphlet No. 8-5, Procurement of Spectacles for Military and 
Other Authorized Personnel, is published for the information and guidance of all 
concerned. 
(A. G. 413.75 (15 Jun 44). 
Order Of The Secretary Of War: 
G. C. MARSHALL, 
Chief of Staff. 
OFFICIAL: 
J. A. ULIO, 
Major General; 
The Adjutant General. 
A TRUE COPY 
S. E. LaRose 
1st Lt., Med. Adm. C. 
AGO 326B 
Page 13